O ServiceManual L30 en

English
Service manual
Philips MicroDose L30

Software 8.4
Service Manual Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4
Service Manual -
Philips MicroDose L30
Software 8.4
Document Title Service Manual Philips MicroDose L30 Software 8.4

Doc. No & Revision 1007989 O
Date 2012-04-19
1007989 O 2 (322)
Sections in the Service Manual:
Introduction and system overview

Introduction
System overview
Overview of modality sub-systems
Starting up the system
How to shut down the system
Preventive maintenance
Service prerequisites and material
Disassembling instructions
Maintenance and inspection
System adjustments
Service tool
Quality control
Service and troubleshooting

Replacement of parts
Test after maintenance or service
Backup procedures
Installing firmware
Image artefacts
Trouble shooting
1007989 O 3 (322)
Contents
1. Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Scope ........................................................................................................................ 9
1.3 Intended readers ........................................................................................................ 9
1.4 Chapter overview ...................................................................................................... 9
1.5 References ................................................................................................................ 9
1.6 Symbols used in the document ............................................................................... 10
1.7 Service and maintenance ........................................................................................ 10
1.8 Definitions, acronyms and abbreviations ............................................................... 11
2. System overview .............................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Mammography stand .............................................................................................. 12
2.2 Side cabinet ............................................................................................................. 13
2.3 Acquisition workstation .......................................................................................... 14
3. Overview of modality sub-systems ................................................................................ 15
3.1 Overview and functionality of sub-systems ........................................................... 15
3.2 System mains power overview ............................................................................... 18
3.3 Performing an exposure .......................................................................................... 19
4. Technical data ................................................................................................................. 21
5. Starting up the system .................................................................................................... 22
5.1 Switch OFF all circuit breakers .............................................................................. 22
5.2 Initial start-up ......................................................................................................... 22
5.3 Fill up the detector cooler ....................................................................................... 23
5.4 Continue the start-up sequence ............................................................................... 25
6. How to shut down the system......................................................................................... 26
6.1 Shutting down the modality .................................................................................... 26
6.2 Cutting power to the system ................................................................................... 26
7. Service prerequisites and material ................................................................................ 28
7.1 Service toolbox ....................................................................................................... 28
7.2 Special software tools ............................................................................................. 31
7.3 Maintenance material ............................................................................................. 31
7.4 Fuses ....................................................................................................................... 32
8. Disassembling instructions ............................................................................................. 34
8.1 X-ray prevent cover (1010576) .............................................................................. 35
8.2 Pre collimator (1010574) ........................................................................................ 39
8.3 Changing compression paddles .............................................................................. 40
8.4 Front cover (1010565/1020252) and Face protection shield (1010564) ................ 41
8.5 Display cover (1010547/1020253) ......................................................................... 42
8.6 C-arm covers (1010558, 1010559) ......................................................................... 43
8.7 Patient support (1010566/1020286) ....................................................................... 44
8.8 Opening and removing the doors of the main cabinet ............................................ 45
8.9 Removing the back plate of the main cabinet ......................................................... 46
8.10 Mounting service wheels for repositioning ............................................................ 47
8.11 Removing the top cover and side panels from detector cooler SMC ..................... 48
9. Maintenance and inspection .......................................................................................... 49
1007989 O 4 (322)
9.1 Annual maintenance and inspection ....................................................................... 49

9.2 Detailed description of annual maintenance tasks .................................................. 49
10. System adjustments ........................................................................................................ 68
10.1 Stand Control System (SCS) configurations .......................................................... 68
10.2 Changing SCS parameters ...................................................................................... 85
10.3 Change dose configuration ..................................................................................... 86
10.4 Change laterality ..................................................................................................... 87
10.5 Detector cooler Lauda (1010595) ........................................................................... 87
10.6 Detector cooler SMC (1018944) ............................................................................ 88
10.7 Field limiter ............................................................................................................ 89
10.8 Compression paddles .............................................................................................. 92
10.9 Compression height limit determination ................................................................ 93
11. Service Tool ..................................................................................................................... 95
11.1 General.................................................................................................................... 95
11.2 Normal Calibrations ............................................................................................... 96
11.3 Service calibrations ................................................................................................. 98
11.4 Measurements ....................................................................................................... 107
11.5 Field limiter scan .................................................................................................. 112
11.6 Reboot CCS .......................................................................................................... 112
11.7 Enable / disable compression paddles .................................................................. 112
11.8 The channel mask ................................................................................................. 113
11.9 AEC Status ........................................................................................................... 115
11.10 Settings ................................................................................................................. 117
11.11 Data acquisition .................................................................................................... 120
12. Quality control .............................................................................................................. 123
13. Replacement of parts .................................................................................................... 126
13.1 Protective earth points and ESD-protection ......................................................... 126
13.2 Collimator Curtain (1010575) .............................................................................. 127
13.3 X-ray prevent cover (1010576) ............................................................................ 134
13.4 X-ray tube unit (1012515) .................................................................................... 135
13.5 X-ray tube filament change .................................................................................. 141
13.6 High voltage generator (1004005) ........................................................................ 142
13.7 X-ray Tube cooling unit (1010594) ...................................................................... 145
13.8 SCS board and box (1010551) .............................................................................. 146
13.9 Patient support (1010566/1020286) ..................................................................... 147
13.10 IPB unit (1007169) ............................................................................................... 148
13.11 Detector Unit (1010572) ....................................................................................... 149
13.12 Scan movement motor (1010588) ........................................................................ 154
13.13 Scan ball-screw and nut (1015560) ...................................................................... 155
13.14 Scan movement nut holder ................................................................................... 158
13.15 Scan motor bearing assembly ............................................................................... 161
13.16 Encoder reader head (1010587) ............................................................................ 166
13.17 Encoder scale (1015557) ...................................................................................... 168
13.18 Upper curtain (1010549) ...................................................................................... 171
13.19 Lower curtain (1010549) ...................................................................................... 172
13.20 Compression pedal (1018052) .............................................................................. 173
13.21 Compression motor (1010589) ............................................................................. 174
13.22 Compression force compensation spring (1005245) ............................................ 175
13.23 Collimator motor (1010592) ................................................................................. 176
13.24 Collimator motor bracket (1015552) + screw (1010591) + motor (1010592) ..... 178
13.25 Motor, Z-height (1010582) ................................................................................... 184
1007989 O 5 (322)
13.26 Motor, rotation (1010583) .................................................................................... 187

13.27 Wire Sensor, Z-height (1010579) ......................................................................... 188
13.28 Wire Sensor, C-rotation ........................................................................................ 189
13.29 Fan unit (1010556) ............................................................................................... 192
13.30 Detector cooler (1010595 or 1018944) ................................................................ 193
13.31 Control board for Lauda detector cooler (1020416) ............................................. 196
13.32 Side cabinet water cooling (1007296) .................................................................. 198
13.33 Side cabinet air cooling (1007296) ....................................................................... 199
13.34 Power supply unit (1019118 or 1020574) ............................................................ 199
13.35 Current limiter (1020443) ..................................................................................... 202
13.36 Adapter board (1012231, 1012232, 1012233) ...................................................... 203
13.37 Time delay relay (1013013) ................................................................................. 204
13.38 Thermostat (1013014) .......................................................................................... 205
13.39 Fan motor exchange including removal of side panels of Lauda detector cooler
(1007030) 206
13.40 Fibre Optic Transceiver, L30 Detector ................................................................. 210
13.41 Temperature sensor PT1 in SMC detector cooler (1019131) ............................... 214
13.42 Temperature sensor PT2 in SMC detector cooler (1019131) ............................... 216
13.43 Pump in SMC detector cooler (1019134) ............................................................. 218
13.44 Fan in SMC detector cooler (1019135) ................................................................ 220
13.45 Level switch in SMC detector cooler (1019133) .................................................. 222
13.46 Pressure sensor in SMC detector cooler (1019132) ............................................. 224
13.47 Dustproof filter in SMC detector cooler (1019130) ............................................. 225
14. Tests after maintenance or service .............................................................................. 226
15. Other tests ...................................................................................................................... 227
15.1 Deviation of collimator screw (relative the scan arm).......................................... 227
15.2 Test end stop of the scan movement ..................................................................... 228
15.3 Verify function of scan movement read head ....................................................... 229
15.4 Test scan speed ..................................................................................................... 230
15.5 Check idle currents of motors ........................................................................... 237
15.6 Radiation leakage ................................................................................................. 240
16. Backup procedures ....................................................................................................... 241
16.1 Backup Acquisition workstation computer .......................................................... 241
16.2 Backup HVG firmware ......................................................................................... 241
16.3 Backup SCS parameters ....................................................................................... 241
16.4 Restore of backup (SCS parameters) .................................................................... 242
17. Installing firmware ....................................................................................................... 243
17.1 Preparing a PC to be used for firmware upgrade .................................................. 243
17.2 IPB ........................................................................................................................ 244
17.3 DU Detector unit ............................................................................................... 245
17.4 SCS ....................................................................................................................... 247
17.5 HVG ...................................................................................................................... 248
18. Image artefacts .............................................................................................................. 257
18.1 Detector Properties Related to Image Quality ...................................................... 257
18.2 Natural image artefacts ......................................................................................... 258
18.3 Severe image artefacts .......................................................................................... 258
18.4 Miscellaneous image artefacts .............................................................................. 260
18.5 Guidelines Image quality problems ................................................................... 261
18.6 Manual masking ................................................................................................... 262
19. Sectra Monitoring ......................................................................................................... 264
1007989 O 6 (322)
20. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 267

20.1 X-ray stability test (Ripple test) ............................................................................ 267
20.2 Communication errors .......................................................................................... 267
20.3 Failed calibrations ................................................................................................. 267
20.4 Explanation of LEDs on the SCS unit .................................................................. 269
20.5 Drawings ............................................................................................................... 271
20.6 Scan movement ..................................................................................................... 272
20.7 Collimator movement ........................................................................................... 274
20.8 Compression movement ....................................................................................... 275
20.9 X-ray system problem identification .................................................................... 276
20.10 Potentiometer problem identification ................................................................... 281
20.11 Encoder problem identification ............................................................................ 284
20.12 Emergency stops ................................................................................................... 287
20.13 Error codes and solutions ..................................................................................... 289
20.14 Alarm codes in SMC detector cooler ................................................................... 314
Appendix A Maintenance and inspection ....................................................................... 316
Appendix B Calibration dependencies ............................................................................ 320
1007989 O 7 (322)
Introduction and system overview

Introduction
System overview
Overview of modality sub-systems
Starting up the system
How to shut down the system
1007989 O 8 (322)
1. Introduction
1.1 Purpose
This manual contains instructions and procedures for regular maintenance and service tasks
regarding Philips MicroDose L30.
1.2 Scope
The information in this document applies to Philips MicroDose L30 for service and
maintenance purposes.
1.3 Intended readers

This manual is intended for service personnel authorized by Philips that have received the
adequate training.
1.4 Chapter overview

Chapter 1 Introduction to this document
Chapter 2 to 6 System overview and normal operation, including start and stop
Chapter 7 Service prerequisites and material
Chapter 8 Disassembling instructions
Chapter 9 Maintenance and inspection
Chapter 10 System adjustments
Chapter 11 Service Tool
Chapter 12 Quality control
Chapter 13 Replacement of parts
Chapter 14 Tests after maintenance or service
Chapter 15 Other tests
Chapter 16 Backup procedures
Chapter 17 Installing Firmware
Chapter 18 Image Artefacts
Chapter 19 Sectra Monitoring
Chapter 20 Trouble shooting
Chapter 8 to 20 provides how-to descriptions and should be regarded as the recommended

procedure for maintenance and service of the modality.
1.5 References
[1] Quality control procedures Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4
[2] AW System administrators guide Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4
[3] Technical Specification Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4
1007989 O 9 (322)
[4] System Installation Manual Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4

[5] Spare Part List Philips MicroDose L30
1.6 Symbols used in the document

Warning!
Warning is used when severe danger for patient, personnel or system

exists.
Caution! Caution is used when danger for patient, personnel or system exists.
Notice Notice is used to underline information of importance.
Exposure
The exposure symbol is used when an exposure is made.
1.7 Service and maintenance

Protocol(s) after service and maintenance should be stored and filed according to company
procedures. The service reports must include:
The name of the device serviced
Any device identifications and control numbers used
The date of service
The individual servicing the device
The service performed
The test and inspection data
The directions for service and maintenance described in this manual must be followed. No
other spare part than those listed in ref [5] may be used. If these conditions are not fulfilled
Philips cannot guarantee function and safety of the equipment and the warranty will not be
applied.
1007989 O 10 (322)
1.8 Definitions, acronyms and abbreviations

ACA Automatic collimator alignment
Application Refers to the Philips MicroDose application.
ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
AWS Acquisition workstation software
AWP Acquisition workstation platform
CCS Control computer software
CIC Cable interface card
Circuit Board Electronics board with mounted components
DQC Daily Quality Control
Dynamometer Also called compression force measurement tool. Instrument used when
testing and verifying compression force, collision protection systems
etcetera.
DDP Default display protocol
DICOM Digital imaging and communications in medicine
DPU Detector power unit
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
ESD Electro static discharge
FDA Food and drug administration
FEC Front end card
Firmware Software embedded in a hardware device (here: binary code for FPGA)
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
HV High voltage
HVG High voltage generator
IPB Image processing board
IPK Image processing kit
LAN Local area network
MC Main cabinet
MDD Medical device directive
MQSA Mammography quality standards act
PCB Printed circuit board, electronics board without mounted components
Philips SE Philips service engineer or physicist from Philips, educated in related
radiation physics and image quality.
SC Side cabinet
SCS Stand Control System
Stand The same as Main cabinet.
System Refers to Philips MicroDose unless the context indicates otherwise.
1007989 O 11 (322)
2. System overview
2.1 Mammography stand
Figure 1 An overview of the mammography stand and its main components.

1 C-arm
2 Upper keypad
3 Face shield
4 Scan arm
5 Compression paddle
6 Side marker buttons
7 Patient support
8 Lower keypad
9 Handle
10 Display
11 Compression paddle
12 Emergency stop button
1007989 O 12 (322)
2.2 Side cabinet
Figure 2 a) Overview of the air-cooled side cabinet and its main components.
b) Exterior of the water-cooled side cabinet.
1 Air cooling unit

2 Fuse and control panel
3 X-ray tube cooler
4 Detector cooling system
5 Water cooling unit
1007989 O 13 (322)
2.3 Acquisition workstation
Figure 3 Overview of the workstation.
1 Radiation protection shield

2 Monitor
3 Keypad
4 Keyboard
5 Mouse
7 Exposure buttons
8 PC
9 Vertically adjustable table
10 Exposure pedal (optional)
1007989 O 14 (322)
3. Overview of modality sub-systems

The first chapter of this section gives a general overview as well as describes the functionality
of the different sub-systems.
The chapters that follow in this section describe what happens when the Modality is turned
on, and before an exposure is made. The description can both be seen as an overview of the
modality sub-systems and how they interact with each other.
3.1 Overview and functionality of sub-systems
Figure 4 Overview and functionality of sub-systems.
Acquisition Workstation Software [A]

The Acquisition Workstation Software provides an interface to the user, for controlling the
Mammography Stand movements, setting parameters for image acquisition and reviewing
acquired images.
The AWS also provides the user with information messages about events at the
Mammography stand, and the interface is updated when manual settings are performed at the
stand. The Acquisition Workstation hands over image data to Image Processing Kit that
performs data processing of images before presentation and storage. The AWS is responsible
for storing the images with corresponding information.
The AWS communicates with the Control Computer Software for providing feedback and
initiating commands.
The Acquisition Workstation Software communicates with other systems PACS and RIS -
through the Acquisition Workstation Platform. It is responsible for sending images to PACS
for storage, and receives patient worklists from RIS. Manual registering of patients for
examination is also possible with the Acquisition Workstation Software.
Acquisition Workstation Platform [B]

The Acquisition Workstation Platform (AWP) provides the computer hardware and software
platform for the Acquisition Workstation Software, Service Tool, Image Processing Kit and
Control Computer Software. The software platform consists of operating system with
configuration.
The computer hardware of the AWP provides part of the physical interface for the user:
computer monitor, keyboard, a customized keypad and mouse. Also included is a network
interface for connecting the system to a hospital network.
1007989 O 15 (322)
Service Tool [C]

The Service Tool provides an interface and software tools for service users, for performing
service tasks at installation and calibration of the system. Main tasks are for detector
electronics trimming and calibration, but also for setting parameters of automatic exposure
software and performing image system alignment.
The Service Tool communicates with the Control Computer Software for initiating commands
and providing feedback of events.
Control Computer Software [D]

The Control Computer Software provides the control logic that interconnects and
synchronizes sub-systems for mammography unit control and image acquisition, i.e. it
communicates with and controls the Stand Control System and the DAQ / Detector systems.
It also communicates with the AWS and Service Tool software to receive user commands and
provide events for feedback to the user. It sets up sub-systems for image acquisition and
enables image acquisition when all sub-systems are prepared and contains calibration data.
When image data is available this is handled by the Control Computer Software for
processing or sending to the Acquisition Workstation Platform for presentation / storage.
Automatic exposure parameters are set by the Control Computer Software, with input from
parameters from SCS, Detector subsystems and user settings.
Patient safety is not directly handled by the Control Computer Software, this is the
responsibility the hardware related sub-systems (Stand Mechanics, Stand Control System, X-
ray System). However, the Control Computer Software handles feedback from safety control
of those sub-systems and provides functionality for user feedback and basic error / emergency
condition recovery.
Image Processing Kit [E]

The Image Processing Kit (IPK) provides data processing of image before presentation and
storage by the AWS. The IPK communicates with the AWS through the AWP.
Data Acquisition System [F]

The Data Acquisition System (DAQ) provides electronics and software that performs control
of the Detector System electronics, and performs data readout and processing into image data.
During image acquisition it receives position information signals from the scan movement
that triggers data readout from the Detector System electronics accordingly. After the scan the
DAQ provides an assembled image as output.
The DAQ communicates with the Control Computer Software for providing output of image
data and feedback of events. Through this communication it also receives commands for start-
up and power up control of DAQ and Detector Unit, setting parameters and calibration data,
allowing start of image acquisition and aborting ongoing activities.
Detector System [G]

The Detector System provides electronics and mechanics for X-ray detection, including
detector cooling. The Detector System also provides part of the electronics platform for data
readout and processing. The Detector Unit of the sub-system is mounted on the scan-arm and
detects X-ray during the scanning movement. Image data is read out and sent to the DAQ for
image building.
1007989 O 16 (322)
Stand Mechanics [H]

The Stand Mechanics sub-system provides all mechanics necessary for patient positioning
and image acquisition at the Mammography Stand, including motors for driving the
movements and buttons for manual movement control. Further, it provides mechanics in
which other sub-systems are contained.
The Stand Mechanics also provides power components and cables for connecting incoming
mains electrical power supply to all sub-systems, including electrical connections for power
on / off of the whole system.
A Radiation shield provides protection for the user workplace at the Acquisition Workstation.
The console consists of a table and a radiation shield. The radiation shield provides protection
for the user workplace, and the table provides mechanical support for the Acquisition
Workstation, and holds exposure buttons and one emergency stop button.
The collimator limits the X-ray from the X-ray System [J] into beams that match the active
area of the detector. It is mounted on the scan arm above the detector unit and is moved into a
position above the breast before each image acquisition.
Stand Control System [I]

The Stand Control System (SCS) provides all the electronics and software that performs
control of mechanical movement of the Mammography Stand and the communication with
the X-ray System for setting up and controlling exposures. The positioning movements of the
Mammography Stand (C-arm height and angle, collimator, compression) are controlled, as
well as the scan movement for image acquisition.
The Stand Control System also handles the synchronization of the scan movement to X-ray
and image acquisition, through providing X-ray on / off signals and position information
signals.
Safety measures for movements and exposure are handled by the Stand Control System,
through detection of collision detectors and stop switches.
The SCS communicates with the Control Computer Software for providing feedback of
events and receiving commands for setting parameters, initializing automatic movements and
allowing start of image acquisition.
X-ray System [J]

The X-ray System provides electronics, hardware and software that produce X-ray. It is
assembled from power supply components and X-ray tube components.
It is controlled through the Stand Control System electronics and software, and safety for X-
ray is handled by the X-ray system components, interlock signals and the Stand Control
System.
1007989 O 17 (322)
3.2 System mains power overview

The system is powered by 3-phase mains power. A 3-phase transformer provides the
appropriate power supply to each sub-system and its components, except for power supply
components of the X-ray system that are supplied directly with 3-phase power. Circuit
breakers and fuses are included in the mains power supply circuits of the system.
A separate single phase mains supply is connected to the network interface device of the
Acquisition Workstation Platform, to ensure galvanic isolation from the hospital network.
Power on / off is performed for all system components with a single action (button press),
which results in closing / opening circuit breakers. Components in the Control Computer
Platform, Acquisition Workstation Platform and X-ray System need to be powered off in a
controlled manner, and delayed shutdown is implemented through activating of a shutdown
signal and delayed power off.
Figure 5 Electric power survey.
1007989 O 18 (322)
3.3 Performing an exposure

Below is a step by step description of the sequence of events when an exposure is performed
on the system.
Figure 6 Performing an exposure.
Start examination [1]

When an examination is opened in the Acquisition Workstation Software, the system is set up
for type of examination and compression paddle by information being sent to the Control
Computer Software. When this setup is done, the Acquisition Workstation Software allows
Compression Done to be performed at the mammography stand.
Setting C-arm Projection [2]

The C-arm projection is normally set from the Acquisition Workstation Software, which
sends commands to the Stand Control System through the Control Computer Software. The
Stand Control System performs control of the C-arm projection movement.
The C-arm projection can also be adjusted manually at the mammography stand, in this case
feedback of the position is provided to the Control Computer Software and the Acquisition
Workstation Software.
Compression and Compression Done [3]

Compression is performed by use of the foot pedals at the mammography stand, and the Stand
Control System is controlling the compression paddle movement. When the compression
adjustment has been finished, the compression done button is pressed which causes the
Stand Control System to set the collimator and the scan arm to the working positions required
for initiating the exposure.
Set Exposure Parameters [4]

When Compression Done is performed, the Control Computer Software calculates exposure
parameters and the information is distributed throughout the system.
The exposure parameters are forwarded to the Stand Control System and to the X-ray System.
The Acquisition Workstation Software also receives the exposure parameters for presentation
to the user. The Data Acquisition System and the Detector System are configured for image
acquisition.
(The description above applies to the normal case when the exposure parameters are set
automatically by the system. The parameters can also be set manually in the Acquisition
Workstation Software interface, in this case the exposure parameters are distributed
throughout the system in a similar manner.)
1007989 O 19 (322)
System Ready and Exposure Enabled [5]

When the system setup is ready and the Acquisition Workstation Software is ready to receive
image data, the initiation of exposure is allowed by sending a command to the Control
Computer Software which is forwarded to the Stand Control System. The Data Acquisition
System and the Detector System is prepared for detecting X-ray.
The Stand Control System enables the exposure by activating a signal to the X-ray system
High Voltage Generator. This is indicated by light signals on the mammography stand and the
exposure buttons, and at this stage the system is ready for starting an exposure by pressing the
Exposure button.
Exposure
When the Exposure button is pressed the
following sequence starts, see Figure 7.
A. The High Voltage Generator is set to
ready to output X-ray.
B. The scan movement is initiated by the
Stand Control System.
C. The X-ray is switched on (after a
scheduled delay), by the Stand Control
System activating a signal to the High
Voltage Generator.
The scan continues with no other
Figure 7 Sequence during exposure.
activities until the image field has been
reached.
D. Trig signals for detector readout are generated by the Stand Control System while the
scan is in the image field.
In the image field, the Detector Unit is detecting X-ray and pixel values are read out
and accumulated into image data by the Data Acquisition System.
E. The trig signals for detector readout are stopped and the X-ray is switched off at the
end of the scan.
F. The scan is finished and the stand is restored to stand-by state.
A complete exposure is performed by pressing and holding the Exposure

Notice button. If the Exposure button is released during this sequence, the
exposure is cancelled.
1007989 O 20 (322)
4. Technical data
See ref [3], Technical Specification for data on e.g. measures, weight, radiation quality and
electrical data such as required type and rating of the external fuse.
1007989 O 21 (322)
5. Starting up the system

Described in this chapter is the procedure for starting up the system after all cables and hoses
have been connected.
5.1 Switch OFF all circuit breakers

Switch OFF the fixed main switch.
In the side cabinet, turn OFF all circuit breakers (labelled F1, F2, etc.) by setting them to
the tripped (open) position, see Figure 8. (A circuit breaker is turned OFF, when its handle is
pointing downwards.)
Figure 8 Circuit breaker positions OFF (down) and ON (up).
5.2 Initial start-up

1. Switch ON the fixed main switch (on wall).
Switch ON the circuit breaker F2 (serving the T1 Transformer). Listen for a slight hum from
the T1 Transformer.
Switch ON the circuit breaker F16 (serving the T2 24 V supply). Check that the green lamps
mounted on the mammography stand and on the side cabinet door light up.
Wait until the green LED on start time relay Re5 inside the side cabinet
is continuously lit.
Press (turn on) the stand ON button. This will supply the stand contactors
K1, and K4 with power. Listen for sound from the contactors K1 and K4
inside the cabinet.
1007989 O 22 (322)
5.3 Fill up the detector cooler

Preparation
Make sure that you have the correct type of water coolant mixture for the detector cooler. Use
the detector cooling fluid provided from Philips (part no. 1013399) that is delivered with the
system. For the Lauda detector cooler, 14.5 litres are needed to fill up the whole system. For
the SMC detector cooler, 7.5 litres are needed.
Always wear protective gloves and protective goggles when handling the
detector cooling fluid.
Caution!
Do not operate the detector cooler without enough cooling fluid in the
tank.
Illustrations
Figure 9 Front panel of Lauda detector cooler. Level indicator (1), Lid to tank (2), Display with
buttons (3), ON/OFF power switch (4).
1007989 O 23 (322)
Figure 10 Front panel of SMC detector cooler. Level indicator (1), Lid to tank (2), Run indicator (3),
Display for current temperature and alarm codes (4), Display for temperature set point (5).
The ON/OFF power switch is found on back of the detector cooler.
Procedure
1. Fold down the foldable rails.
2. If the SMC detector cooler is used, unscrew the four screws of the bracket holding the
detector cooler and lift off the bracket.
Pull out the detector cooler on the rails, see Figure 9 and Figure 10.
Unscrew the screws holding the metal shelter in place and remove the shelter. Note that the
shelter shall be remounted if moving the side cabinet to a new location.
Unscrew the lid on the front of the detector cooler.
Make sure that you have the correct type of water coolant mixture for the
Notice! detector cooling unit.
Use Detector cooling fluid (Part no 1013399).
Fill up the coolant system with fluid using a can with a funnel. Fill up to the indicated
maximum level shown by the level indicator on the front of the unit.
Switch ON the circuit breaker F10.
Check all hoses and connections for leakage. In case of leakage, immediately turn the cooler
OFF and attend to the fault.
Be prepared to turn off the detector cooler if the fluid level runs below the
Caution!
indicated minimum level.
If necessary, fill up the coolant system with more fluid until the fluid level stabilizes and all
air has disappeared from the system and the hoses. Fill up to the indicated maximum level.
Check that the temperature set point is set to 20C. If not, adjust the set point to 20C
according to the instructions in sections 10.5.1 or 10.6.4.
Screw the lid back on and tighten thoroughly.
Roll the detector cooler back into the side cabinet.
If the SMC detector cooler is used, screw the bracket holding the detector cooler back in
place.
Unscrew the four screws of the foldable rails, remove the rails and store them on site.
1007989 O 24 (322)
5.4 Continue the start-up sequence

1. Switch ON the circuit breaker F14 (serving the side cabinet fan, or water cooling
unit). The fan should start to rotate (in case of air-cooling) or the water cooler should
start up (in case of water-cooling). In case of water-cooling, check for leakage.
2. Switch ON the circuit breaker F13 (serving the X-ray cooling unit).
Listen for sound from the X-ray cooling unit.
3. Switch ON the circuit breaker F1 (serving the high voltage generator 3 phase).
In this case there is no visible or audible indication.
4. Switch ON the circuit breaker F12 (serving the high voltage generator single phase
supply). Check that the green indicator on the generator is lit.
5. Switch ON the circuit breaker F11 (serving the Acquisition Workstation platform.)
The Acquisition Workstation PC should now have power.
6. Switch ON the circuit breaker F15 (serving the SCS, the IPB and the 24 V connection
box). The display on the front of the mammography should show three hyphens ( - - -
) and a slight sound should come from the stand power supply unit.
Table 1 Fuses.
Order Component Serving Noticeable condition when turned on
1 F2 T1 Transformer A slight hum from the T1 Transformer.
2 F16 T2 24 V supply The green lamps mounted on the

mammography stand and on the side
cabinet door light up.
3 The stands ON System on Sounds from contactor K1 and K4 inside
button the side cabinet.
4 F10 Detector Cooling Sound from the detector cooler.
unit
5 F14 Side cabinet fan, or The fan should start to rotate (in case of
water cooling unit air-cooling) or the water cooler should
start up (in case of water-cooling).
6 F13 X-ray cooling unit Listen for sound from the X-ray cooling
unit.
7 F1 High voltage No visible or audible indication.
generator 3 phase
8 F12 High voltage Green indicator on the generator.
generator single
phase supply
9 F11 Acquisition The acquisition workstation should now
Workstation have power.
10 F15 SCS, IPB and 24V The display on the front of the
connection box mammography should show three
hyphens ( - - - ) and a slight sound should
come from the stand power supply unit.
1007989 O 25 (322)
6. How to shut down the system
Please note that during a normal installation process shutting down the
Notice
system will not be necessary.
6.1 Shutting down the modality

Press the OFF button on the side of the mammography stand. The system
will shut down regardless of its current state, with a delay of
approximately 1 minute. This delay allows the Acquisition Workstation
computer to end its processes before the power is shut off.
6.2 Cutting power to the system

The power supply to the whole system can be turned off with the fixed main switch located
close to the side cabinet. This fixed main switch will cut the supply current to the system in
one single action.
Please note that the customer is allowed to install an additional power switch, or emergency
stop, but only before the fixed main switch.
1007989 O 26 (322)
Preventive maintenance
Service prerequisites and material
Disassembling instructions
Maintenance and inspection
System adjustments
Service tool
Quality control
1007989 O 27 (322)
7. Service prerequisites and material

7.1 Service toolbox
The service toolbox must at least include the following items:
q 5.5, 8, 10, 12, 13, and 15 mm fixed keys
q 7, 17 and 24 mm fixed keys (for replacement of spare parts of SMC detector cooler)
q T-shaped Allen key 1, 2.5, 3, 4, 5 and 10 mm
q Socket wrench kit
q Torque wrench 5 25 Nm (for M8 nut on scan ball screw, needs an open 13mm key)
q Torque wrench 2 20 Nm (for 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10 mm Allen screws)
q Torque screw driver 0.3 1.2 Nm (for 2 and 2.5 mm Allen screws)
q Spanner (large + small)
q Hacksaw (or just blades)
q Side cutters (large + small)
q Cable ties (large +small)
q Long nose pliers
q Precision file set
q Screwdriver kit (large + small)
q Allen key kit (1.5 - 9 mm + inch)
q Torx kit
q Heat shrink (large + small)
q Cable shoes (three sizes)
q Pliers for cable shoes
q Water level
q Vernier calliper
q Tape measure
q Crimp kit
q Crimp pliers
q Soldering iron
q Solder
q Electric torch
q Multimeter (Fluke 87 V TRMS)
q Multimeter accessories ("Fluke Suregrip" cable kit and "ToolPak" magnetic hanging device)
q ESD protective devices, including wrist strap and anti-static mat
Consumptions goods
q Electrical tape
q Duct tape (TESA)
q PTFE tape
q Double sided adhesive tape
q Fuses (See section 7.4)
q Lubrication
a. C-arm rotation centre
(Part no. 1013018)
b. C-arm height movement and compression movement screw
(Part no. 1013019)
c. Collimator and scan movement
(Part no: 1015566)
q Loctite 243 (for locking and sealing of threaded fasteners).
q Loctite 641
q Loctite 480
1007989 O 28 (322)
q Loctite Hysol 9644
1007989 O 29 (322)
The following items should also be included in the toolbox, but are supplied by Philips:
Unique Philips tools

q Exposure and emergency button mounting tool (Part no. 1013035)
q Exposure and emergency button dismounting tool (Part no. 1013036)
q Varian silicon grease (Part no. 1013020)
q Xilinx adapter (Part no. 1013038)
q Automatic collimator alignment tool (ACA)1 (Part no. 1015294)
q Replacement power supply for ACA (Part no. 1013083)
q Replacement power cable for ACA (Part no. 1013086)
q Unfors dose meter
q HVG programming kit (Part no. 1013088)
q Hose clamp Pliers (Part no 1013091)
q Dismounting tool D-SUB (Part no. 1013092)
q Dismounting tool AMP (Part no. 1019093)
q Dismounting tool (Part no. 1013094)
q Clamps (2 pcs) for securing the C-arm height (Part no. 1012831)
q Scale applicator (Part no. 1015564)
q Readhead setting jig 0.8 mm (Part no. 1015565)
q Toolkit SMC (Part no. 1019129)
Phantoms
q Line pair phantom (Part no. 1010618)
q CDMAM phantom (Part no. 1013026)
q RMI phantom (Only US market. Part no. 1013027)
q PAS phantom (Only on certain markets. (Part no. 1014958)
QC kit
q PMMA plates 6*1 cm + 0.5*2 cm (Part no. 1013028)
q Aluminium filter (Part no. 1013029)
q Compression force measuring tool (Part no. 1013030)
q Fluorescent Paper (Part. No.1013032)
q Compression height calibration reference phantom (Part no. 1013031)
q Geometry phantom (Part no. 1012092)
q Transport bag for the QC kit (Part no. 1013034)
Recommended additional equipment

q USB hard drive
q Rubber gloves
q Protective rubber sheet
q Mirrors
q Serial cable 9 pin female/male
q Temperature logging device (e.g. KIMO KTT 300)
1
Only compatible with L30.
1007989 O 30 (322)
7.2 Special software tools

SCS Calibration Tool
This software is used to copy configuration parameters to/from the SCS permanent memory
and to calibrate the SCS. It can also be used to control single motors and to read the status
from the SCS. The software is intended to run from the AW.
iMPACT
This software is used as an separate interface during service. iMPACT is to be used with a
Xilinx hardware, which connects to the IPB unit, DU or SCS board through the Xilinx
Platform Cable USB. This software is run from a service PC.
Spellman Firmware Upload GUI (USB version)
Used for firmware upgrade of HVG. It runs from a service PC and connects to the HVG
with the HVG programming kit (Part no. 1013088).
Spellman Mamea GUI (USB version)
Used during firmware upgrade of HVG to check status of the HVG. It runs from a service
pc and connects to the HVG with the HVG programming kit (Part no. 1013088)
7.3 Maintenance material

Annual Maintenance kit (Part no. 1016370)
24 months Maintenance kit (Part no. 1016719)
Cleaning agent containing 45% isopropyl alcohol for cleaning patient support, covers,
handles etcetera.
White gasoline (Chemical clean gasoline)
Clean cloths
Detector cooling fluid. (Part no. 1013399)
Delivered with the system.
Topz
1007989 O 31 (322)
7.4 Fuses
See Table 1 in Section 5.4 for fuses located in the side cabinet.
See Table 2 below for fuses located on the SCS-board.
Table 2 Fuses on SCS-board in main cabinet.
Illustration of SCS-board with fuses.
Part no. # Part Name Description
1 Fuse for C-motor 20A Very fast acting Littlefuse series 297 fuse
2 Fuse for Z-motor 20A Very fast acting Littlefuse series 297 fuse
Fuse for motor

3 30A Very fast acting Littlefuse series 297 fuse
power supply unit
4 Fuse for 5V input 3A Very fast acting Littlefuse Nano2 fuse
5 Fuse for 24 input 1A Very fast acting Littlefuse Nano2 fuse
Fuse for collimator

motor
7 Fuse for Aux-motor 20A Very fast acting Littlefuse series 297 fuse
8 Fuse for Scan-motor 20A Very fast acting Littlefuse series 297 fuse
Fuse for work lamp

9 1A Very fast acting Littlefuse Nano2 fuse
output
Fuse for
compression motor
1007989 O 32 (322)
1012490 Fuse Kit 20 A 5 pcs
1012492 Fuse Kit 30A 5 pcs
1012494 Fuse Kit 3 A 5 pcs
1012490, 1012492, 1012493, 1012494,

1012496 Fuse Kit Complete
1012495
1007989 O 33 (322)
8. Disassembling instructions
This chapter contains instructions on how to dismantle and remove parts and covers that, when
removed, will allow service personnel access to other vital parts of the system.
Testing according to section 13.41 must always be performed after any

Notice
mechanical adjustment of the equipment has been done.
Figure 11 Detailed view of the mammography stand.
1. X-ray prevent system

2. Pre collimator
3. Right and left C-arm covers
4. C-arm front cover
5. Face protection shield
6. Compression paddle
7. Display cover
1007989 O 34 (322)
8.1 X-ray prevent cover (1010576)

Preparation
Check that the stand is in emergency stop mode.
Figure 12 Wrong and correct handling of the X-ray prevent cover.

(Wrong handling might cause permanent scratches on the intersections.)
Procedure - disassembling
1. Protect the patient support with (corrugated) cardboard or similar.
2. Dismount the X-ray prevent cover from the pre-collimator by loosen the Allen screw
securing the lock mechanism in the grey aluminum part a little bit. See A in the figure
below.
Do not move the X-ray prevent cover by holding on to the intersections.

Notice This might cause permanent scratches on the X-ray prevent cover.
See Figure 12 above for correct handling.
3. Move the X-ray prevent cover upwards by holding on to the grey aluminum part A.
4. Loosen (do not remove) the Allen screws B
and C that hold the upper part of the X-ray
prevent cover to the scan beam.
5. Un-hook the X-ray prevent cover from the three
Allen screws. (Depending on the construction of
the scan beam it might be necessary to remove
the two front screws C in order to remove the
X-ray prevent cover.)
1007989 O 35 (322)
Figure 13 Reassemble the X-ray prevent cover.
Procedure - reassemble
1. Check that the two top screws of the X-ray prevent cover are not tightened in order to
allow adjustment. See B in Figure 13. (This only applies the first time the X-ray prevent
cover is mounted.)
2. Mount the X-ray prevent cover by lifting it up and hook it on the screws. See A in
Figure 13. (Depending on the construction of the C-arm, it might be necessary to remove
some of the screws A before positioning and securing the X-ray prevent cover.)
3. Fasten but do not secure the three Allen screws,
A. (I.e. the screws should be secured but allow
a certain amount of movement/adjustment.)
4. Move the X-ray prevent cover in its top end
position. Check if the magnet is able to hold the
X-ray prevent cover in its top end position.
5. If applicable, remove the plastic bag from the
collimator cradle.
6. Check that the collimator is free from dirt and
small metal particles. If necessary, use topz for
cleaning.
7. Move the interface to its lowest position by hand
(by holding on to the grey aluminum part, see
Figure 12 and D in Figure 14.
8. Attach the X-ray prevent cover to the interface.
See C in Figure 14.
9. Tighten the three Allen screws, A, at 2.9 Nm.
Figure 14 Attach the X-ray prevent cover
(D) to the interface (C).
1007989 O 36 (322)
10. Tighten the Allen screw securing the lock mechanism in the grey aluminum part D.
11. Check that the C-arm and scan-arm are in vertical position.
12. Check that the two top screws C of the X-ray prevent cover are not tightened in order to
allow adjustment. (This only applies the first time the X-ray prevent cover is mounted.).
Figure 15 Test and adjust the X-ray prevent cover after mounting.
13. Move the interface A up and down, see Figure 15. Check that the two lowest parts B
of the X-ray shield are moving simultaneously and smooth.
14. Move the interface A to its lowest position (see Figure 15).
15. Secure the two top screws C at 2.9 Nm.
In order to avoid affecting the line-up of the X-ray prevent cover; do not
Notice
touch the X-ray prevent cover when securing the screws.
The X-ray prevent cover should now be positioned. This operation should only need to
be performed once. I.e. if the X-ray prevent cover is removed and re-mounted, the top
screws C should not need to be adjusted again.
16. Move the interface A up and down by hand.
a. Check that there is a play between the moving parts of the X-ray prevent cover
(see B with red marks in Figure 15).
b. Check that the moving parts B are moving simultaneously and smooth. If not,
try to adjust using the four screws D.
17. Check that the X-ray prevent cover does not press against the collimator. (Too much
pressure might affect the collimator alignment.)
18. Check that there is no built-in tension in the mount: De-attach the X-ray prevent cover
from the interface A and re-attach.
19. Secure the quick lock with the Allen screw E.
1007989 O 37 (322)
Procedure - Finalization
1. Verify that the X-ray prevent cover is mounted correctly by performing a Daily Quality
Control according to Quality control procedures, ref [1].
a. Check that there are no artefacts in the image.
b. Check that the X-ray prevent cover does not mask the image near the chest wall.
Solution for masked image:
i. Loosen the top screws (C in Figure 16). One on each side.
ii. Tilt the X-ray prevent cover a little bit forward.
iii. Repeat step 13 above to verify smooth movement.
iv. Perform a Daily Quality Control.
Figure 16 (A) X-ray beam (grey area)

(B) The limited play (1.5 mm) between X-ray beam and X-ray prevent cover.
(C) Top screws. One on each side of the X-ray prevent cover.
2. With the X-ray prevent cover mounted; verify collimator alignment according to chapter
11.3.4 in 0, +90 and -90.
3. Run a scan speed test in the Service Tool (chapter 11.4.4) at low and high speed
respectively. Run scan speed in 0, +90 and -90. Verify that the vibrations does not
generate disturbing noise from the X-ray prevent cover.
1007989 O 38 (322)
8.2 Pre collimator (1010574)

Preparation
Loosen the lower part of the X-ray prevent cover, see (A) in Figure 17 and move it to its upper
position. (A magnet secures the X-ray prevent cover in this position.)
1. Remove the Allen screw securing both pre collimator and interface. See Figure 17 a.
2. Remove the pre collimator and interface. See Figure 17 b.
Figure 17 Disassembling of the pre-collimator.
Procedure reassembling
Reassemble the pre collimator and interface in reverse order according to Figure 17. Tighten the
screw at 9.7 Nm.
1007989 O 39 (322)
8.3 Changing compression paddles
Figure 18 Changing compression paddles.
Removing the compression paddle

1. Press down the two locking arms, see Figure 18 a.
2. Holding the compression paddle with both hands (one on each side), pull the compression
paddle straight outwards.
Mounting the compression paddle

Mount the compression paddle arms straight into the slots on the stand, see Figure 18 b.
When the compression paddle is fully inserted and locked in position a

Notice
clicking sound is heard from the mechanism.
1007989 O 40 (322)
8.4 Front cover (1010565/1020252) and Face protection shield

(1010564)
Preparation
Loosen the lower part of the X-ray prevent cover and move it to its upper position. See steps 1-3
in the disassembling instructions in section 8.1. (A magnet secures the X-ray prevent cover in this
position.)
1. Unsnap the face protection shield and
remove it, see Figure 19.
2. From underneath, disconnect the two cable
connectors that are attached to the
manoeuvre buttons on the Front cover.
3. Loosen the four hexagonal screws that hold
the front cover in place. See A in Figure
19. Do not remove the four screws just
loosen them. This will enable you to slide
the front cover slightly outward so that it
can be removed. (As the four holes in the
front cover are key hole-shaped.) Figure 19 Remove the face protection
shield.
Procedure - remounting
1. Slip the cover onto the four
screws. See A in Figure 20.
Slide the cover inwards until the
Front cover reaches the guides
B.
2. Secure the front cover by
fastening the four hexagonal
screws that hold the Front cover in
place.
3. Re-mount the two cable Figure 20 Dissemble front cover.
connectors.
4. Mount the Face protecting shield.
1007989 O 41 (322)
8.5 Display cover (1010547/1020253)

Procedure disassembling
Figure 21 Lift off display cover. Left: Stand without protective metal plate. Right: Stand with protective
metal plate.
Figure 22 Lift off protective metal plate.
1. Unscrew the two Allen screws at the bottom of the display cover, see A in Figure 21.
2. Unhook the upper part of the display cover from the stand and lift off the display cover,
see B in Figure 21.
3. If the stand has a protective metal plate, unscrew the two Allen screws at the bottom of
the metal plate, see A in Figure 22.
4. If the stand has a protective metal plate, unscrew, unhook the upper part of the metal plate
from the stand and lift off the metal plate, see B in Figure 22.
Procedure - reassembling
1. If the stand has a protective metal plate, hook the upper part of the metal plate back onto
the stand.
2. If the stand has a protective metal plate, screw the two Allen screws at the bottom of the
metal plate.
3. Hook the upper part of the display cover back onto the stand.
4. Screw the two Allen screws at the bottom of the display cover.
1007989 O 42 (322)
8.6 C-arm covers (1010558, 1010559)

Preparation
Remove the face protection shield and the front cover as described in section 8.4.
Remove the four screws in Figure 23.
Figure 23 Disassembling of side covers.
Each side cover (left and right) is secured with four hexagonal screws and two cover nuts. These
screws are positioned as follows: one on the lower side of the C-arm, three on the back and two on
the top of the C-arm, see Figure 23 a.
1. If necessary, rotate the C-arm for easy access and remove the screws.
2. Remove the side covers from the C-arm; see Figure 23 b and c.
3. Return the C-arm to the zero degree position.
1. Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
2. When reassembling the side covers, make sure that the chink between the left side cover
and patient support is the same as between the right side cover and patient support.
Figure 24 Chinks between patient support and side covers.
1007989 O 43 (322)
8.7 Patient support (1010566/1020286)

Tools
4 mm Allen key.
Torque wrench with 4 mm Allen bits.
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers as described in section 8.6.
Rotate the C-arm to 180.
The upper part of the detector unit is very fragile. Make sure that the
Caution! patient support does not touch the detector during mounting/dismounting
of the patient support.
1. Disconnect the five cables connected to the patient support. Note the routing of the cables.
2. Remove the six Allen screws and washers. See Figure 25.
3. Carefully slide the patient
support off the C-arm. (Try to
pull out the lower part of the
patient support first in order to
reduce the risk of touching the
upper part of the detector when
the patient support comes loose.)
1. Carefully slide the patient
support on to the C-arm. The
patient support should be placed
on the three nut bar-pins. Figure 25 Removing the six Allen screws securing the
patient support. (The last two screws on the
2. Tighten the six Allen screws with right side of the patient support are not
washers at 9.8 Nm. visible in this illustration.)
3. Connect the cables of the patient
support.
1007989 O 44 (322)
8.8 Opening and removing the doors of the main cabinet

Preparation
Remove the display cover (in order to reach the lock device of the side doors). See section 8.5 for
instructions.
Procedure disassembling of the left door

1. Open the left side door of the main cabinet.
2. Loosen the protective earth cable (connected
between each door and main cabinet) and the
cable to the emergency stop button.
3. Remove the upper pin securing the left door
by hitting the pin from below (e.g. using a thin
screwdriver and a hammer) until the upper
part of the pin can be grabbed using a tongs.
See Figure 26.
Make sure that the welded joint is not
damaged during this operation. Figure 26 Removing upper pin of
4. Carefully lift off the door. side door.
Procedure disassembling of the right door

The right door is removed in the same way as the left with the exception that the cables (to the
buttons mounted on the door) cannot be removed from the door.
After disassembling, the right door has to be carefully leaned against the main cabinet or (if
possible) against a wall.
Make sure that doors, covers and ground plate do not get any scratches or
Notice
other damages during disassembling and reassembling of the doors.
Procedure reassemble
Repeat the steps above in reverse order.
1007989 O 45 (322)
8.9 Removing the back plate of the main cabinet

Preparation
Remove the doors as described in section 8.8.
Procedure disassemble
1. Lift off the top cover of the main cabinet.
2. Loosen, do not remove, the two screws securing the back plate to the
main cabinet. Note how the protective earth cable marked BC is
mounted.
Figure 27 Back plate protective earth cable. (Back plate not mounted in the image.)
3. Lift off the back plate.
Make sure that doors, covers and ground plate do not get any scratches or
Notice
other damages during this operation.
Procedure - reassemble
1. Repeat the steps above in reverse order. Make sure that the protective earth cable is firmly
fastened to the back plate.
2. Measure the resistance between incoming earth in the side cabinet and the screw that
secures the protective earth cable to the back plate. The resistance must be less than 0.2
ohm.
Make sure that the protecting earth cable is correctly reconnected when
Caution!
the back plate is remounted on the main cabinet.
1007989 O 46 (322)
8.10 Mounting service wheels for repositioning

Preparation
Short distance moving:

a. Position C-arm in 0, patient support 1 m above the floor.
b. Power down the main cabinet using F1, F12 and F15.
Long distance moving:

a. Rotate the C-arm to 180 and at lowest possible height
b. Power down the system using the OFF-button, see section 6.1.
c. Switch off the fuses listed in Table 1 in section 5.4.
d. Switch of the main switch (on wall).
e. Disconnect cables and hoses to the side cabinet.
Procedure - Assemble service wheels on the main cabinet

1. Mount the threaded pins to the ground plate, see Figure 28.
2. Mount the left and right rear wheels in the threaded holes as shown in Figure 28. Screw
the vertical bolts only a few rounds (alternate between left and right wheel) so that the
rear wheels barely lift the rear end of the ground plate above the floor.
Figure 28 Mounting rear service wheels on the main cabinet.
3. Mount the threaded pins to the ground plate, Figure 29.

4. Mount the front wheels in the threaded holes as shown in Figure 29. Screw the vertical
bolts only a few rounds so that the front wheels barely lift the front of the ground plate
above the floor.
1007989 O 47 (322)
Figure 29 Mounting right front wheel. The left wheel is mounted in a similar way.
5. Continue to screw the four vertical bolts (alternate between front and rear wheels) until
the ground plate is in the desired height above the floor.
Procedure - Disassemble service wheels on the main cabinet

Unscrew the four bolts. Alternate between left and right, front and rear, until the wheels can be
removed.
8.11 Removing the top cover and side panels from detector
cooler SMC
To remove the top cover, unscrew the two screws of the top cover and lift off the cover.
To remove the side panels, unscrew the six screws of each panel and lift off the panels.
1007989 O 48 (322)
9. Maintenance and inspection

After maintenance the tests in section 13.41 should be performed.
9.1 Annual maintenance and inspection

See Appendix A, page 316 for
Annual maintenance and inspection/replacement.
Additional replacement of parts.
9.2 Detailed description of annual maintenance tasks

9.2.1 Compression force
Check the actual compression force against the value that is shown on the display. The indicated
and measured values may not differ more than 20 N.
The complete procedure is described in the Quality control procedures [1].
9.2.2 Compression height

Inspection of the compression height should be done at least once a year, or if service has been
done on the compression mechanics.
1. Check the height by placing a solid object with a known height on the patient support and
make a compression.
2. Compare the objects actual height with the value shown on the display. (The value shown
on the display should be of adequate accuracy for this test. For 0.1 mm accuracy the value
can be retrieved via the Service tool.). For limits and specification see Quality control
procedures [1].
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all calibrated compression paddles.
9.2.3 Cables
Thoroughly check that all cables and cable chains are correctly routed. Make sure that no cables
are jammed, pinched or is showing sign of wear.
Also check that no cables are obstructing the movement of the mechanical parts in the modality.
9.2.4 Movement of the modality

1. Test the mechanical movements of the modality (up/down, rotate clockwise/counter-
clockwise, etc.). During the movement, listen for any abnormal sounds from the
modality that may indicate wear or incorrect adjustment of parts.
2. Press Emergency stop on the stand.
3. Test the compression movement by moving the compression paddle up and down by
hand. The compression paddle should be easy and smooth to move without any noise.
4. Test the collimator movement by moving the collimator up and down by hand. The
collimator should be easy and smooth to move any noise.
5. Restore the Emergency stop button.
6. Reset the stand by pressing Reset.
9.2.5 Buttons and levers

Verify that all buttons and levers on the modality are working properly. See ref [1].
1007989 O 49 (322)
9.2.6 Emergency stops

Verify the function of the two emergency stops on the mammography stand and the single
emergency stop on the workstation table. See ref [1].
9.2.7 Indicator lamps and lights

Check all visible indication lamps and lights; exposure buttons, Left/Right (SIN/DX) indicators on
the object table, power lamps on mammography stand and on the side cabinet. See ref [1].
Check that external exposure indicator lamp (optional) outside the examination room is working
properly.
9.2.8 Fans
Mammography stand
The fan unit is designed to force air into the stand and is located on the back of the mammography
stand.
1. Inspect that the fan unit (with two fans) is working properly.
2. Replace the filter of the fan unit (once each year).
Side cabinet
In case of an air-cooled side cabinet, check the top fan (mounted on the roof of the cabinet).
9.2.9 Mechanical compression safety coupling

The compression movement has a max compression force limiter implemented in hardware that
will put the system in emergency stop if the compression force is above 250N (20N).
Procedure
1. Start SCS Calibration Tool.
2. Mount a compression force measurement tool in order to see at which force the
compression will be interrupted.
3. For projections 0 and 60, repeat steps 4 to 11 several times (3-4 tests) in order to get
good repeatability. The extreme values in each projection should be regarded, not the
average.
4. Reset SCS in calibration mode (Settings /Reset SCS Calibration Mode).
5. Set the desired projection (according to step 3).
6. Go to the Runtime tab in SCS Calibration Tool and select the motor Compression
(under Motor / Selected Motor).
7. Reset the dial.
8. Press button Goto and select New Position = 0 and Speed = 50. (The compression
will move down immediately after Speed has been entered.)
9. Wait until the stand enters emergency stop state.
10. Record the mechanical compression force limit shown on the compression force
measurement tool.
11. If the mechanical compression safety coupling is working properly, the compression shall
have been disengaged when the compression force exceeds 25 daN (+/- 2 daN).
1007989 O 50 (322)
12. Reset the system (by pressing the Reset button on the stand) to make it available for
normal use again.
9.2.10 Software max compression force limit

The compression movement has a max compression force limit implemented in software that will
put the system in emergency stop if the calculated compression force is above 220N. This could
occur if there is a problem with the compression encoder.
Procedure
1. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to 0.
2. Mount a compression force measurement tool
3. Place a soft phantom below the pad of the compression force measurement tool.
4. Perform a Reset (normal mode) to make sure that the stand is in normal mode.
5. Use SCS Calibration Tool to temporarily change the maximal force (Compression,
MaxForce) to 230N.
6. Reset the dial and compress until the stand emergency stops with error code 3-502-2.
7. Record the value shown on the display of the stand just before the stand enters emergency
stop. The value shall be 22-23 daN.
8. Record the value shown on the compression force measurement tool. The value shall be
the same as in step 7 ( 2 daN).
normal use again
9.2.11 Collision protection, collimator

The collimator has a collision protection that stops the movement (and sets the stand in emergency
stop state) when a force larger than a calibrated limit (<75N) is applied to the collimator cover
from below.
Procedure
1. Remove the compression paddle.
2. Take the force measurement tool, and remove the bracket holding the dynamometer, then
reverse the dynamometer and remount it. Compress the dynamometer by hand and verify
that the motion is not obstructed by the mounting bracket.
3. Attach the force measurement tool to the modality. Ensure that the measurement pad now
points towards the collimator.
Place a thick soft material on the patient support to protect from the falling
Caution! dynamometer dial when emergency stop is activated.
4. Start SCS Calibration Tool.

5. For projections 0 and 90, repeat steps 5 to 11 several times (3-4 tests) in order to get
good repeatability. The extreme values in each projection should be regarded, not the
average.
6. Reset SCS in calibration mode (Settings / Reset SCS - Calibration Mode).
7. Set the desired projection.
1007989 O 51 (322)
8. Go to tab Runtime in SCS Calibration Tool and select the motor Collimator (under Motor
/ Selected Motor).
9. Reset the dial on the force measurement tool.
10. Press button Goto and select New Position = 2300 and Speed = 1000. (The collimator
will move down immediately after Speed has been entered.)
11. Wait until the stand enters emergency stop state.
12. Record the force shown on the force measurement tool. (If the collision protection for the
collimator is working properly, the collimator shall stop and the stand enter emergency
stop when the force is less than 75N.)
13. If the test for any projection indicates a higher force than 75N, recalibrate the collision
protection for the collimator with SCS Calibration Tool.
normal use again.
15. Restore the force measurement tool to the original direction. Compress the dynamometer
by hand and verify that the motion is not obstructed by the mounting bracket.
9.2.12 Collision protection, C-arm height movement

The C-arm has a collision protection for height movement that stops the stand height movement at
a force of maximum 300N.
If any of the tests indicates a higher level than mentioned above, recalibrate the collision
protection with the SCS Calibration Tool.
Procedure
1. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to 0.
2. Move the height to 110 cm.
3. Apply the dynamometer from below so that it will hit the bottom of the patient support at
current height.
4. Move the height to 120 cm.
5. Set temporarily HighSpeed for C-arm Height to 10. (High speed will be 1 cm/s.)
6. Reset the dynamometer.
7. Lower the C-arm until the collision protection sets in. (The height will move up 1cm after
collision has occurred.)
8. Make a note of the measured value on the dynamometer. The value shall be less than
300N.
9. Restore the changed HighSpeed for C-arm height to its original value (50).
normal use again.
1007989 O 52 (322)
9.2.13 Collision protection, C-arm rotation

The rotation has a collision protection device that stops the stand c-rotation movement at a force
of maximum 300 N measured at a distance 0.6 m from rotation centre. This collision protection
shall be verified twice, first with the C-arm in +90 angle and then in -90 angle.
If the test indicates a higher level than mentioned above, recalibrate the collision protection with
the Calibration Tool.
Procedure
1. Set the C-arm at a height of approximately 90cm.
2. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to +80.
3. Apply the dynamometer from below so that it will hit the C-arm at current position. Note:
The hit shall occur at a radius of approximately 60 cm from the centre (at the X-ray tube).
4. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to +70.
5. Set temporarily MaxSpeed for C-arm Rotation to 200. (Rotation speed will be 2/s.)
7. Rotate the C-arm clockwise until the collision protection sets in.
8. Make a note of the measured value on the dynamometer. The value shall be
approximately 240N20N but absolutely not above 300N
9. Set the C-arm at a height of 90cm.
10. Restore the changed MaxSpeed for C-arm rotation to its original value (1000).
11. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to -80.
12. Apply the dynamometer from below so that it will hit the C-arm at current position. Note:
The hit shall occur at a radius of approximately 60 cm from the centre (at the X-ray tube).
13. Set the projection (C-arm angle) to -70.
14. Set temporarily MaxSpeed for C-arm Rotation to 200. (Rotation speed will be 2/s.)
16. Rotate the C-arm anti-clockwise until the collision protection sets in.
17. Make a note of the measured value on the dynamometer. The value shall be
approximately 240N20N and absolutely not above 300N.
18. Restore the changed MaxSpeed for C-arm rotation to its original value (1000).
normal use again.
1007989 O 53 (322)
9.2.14 Current through the X-ray tube protective earth

Procedure
1. Dismount the C-arm side covers, see section
8.6.
2. Measure the protective ground between the X-
ray tube (see Figure 30) and the yellow-green
PE-terminals on the X1 terminal on the mains
power plate in the side cabinet (X1:PE).
The resistance must not be higher than 0.2
between these two points.
If the resistance is higher than this value:

Figure 30 Protective Earth Screw
Check that all screws connected to protective on X-ray tube.
ground are properly fastened.
Check that there is no dirt between connector and contacts.
Check that there are no signs of oxidation on the cables or contacts.
Check that the cables are attached properly.
Check that the crimp terminals are tightened.
Check the resistance of any extension cable connected to the instrument during
measurement. (Subtract the resistance of this cable from the result.)
Follow the procedure in step 2 above.
9.2.15 Compression paddle (horizontal to patient support)

Procedure
Lower the compression paddle down towards the patient support and visually verify that the
compression paddle is horizontal (seen from the front). That is, that the gap between the
compression paddle and the patient support on the left side should be equal to the gap on the right
side.
Handling irregularities
If the left and right gap (mentioned above) differs:
Check if the compression paddle is mounted correctly
Check if the compression paddle is skewed
Check if the compression mechanics is skewed or damaged. If so, contact support.
1007989 O 54 (322)
9.2.16 Hoses and hose connections

Thoroughly check all detector cooling hoses and connections for any signs of cracks, ruptures or
leakage.
If dents or scratches are found it may be the start of a crack and the hose shall be replaced, see
Figure 31.
Figure 31 Typical crack in hose. The hose must be replaced. Note that the appearance of the hose may be
different than illustrated here.
Cosmetic defects such as discolouration or yellowing are allowed. Smooth deformations without
sharp edges that are caused by contact with clamping are also allowed.
9.2.17 Inspect and clean the detector cooler

The detector cooler can easily be inspected and cleaned when it is rolled out on the rails, for
example when the detector cooling fluid is being changed.
Procedure
1. Look for dust on the condenser, ventilation opening and front grille. Use compressed air
or a vacuum cleaner to remove dust. If necessary remove one or both side walls in order
to facilitate cleaning.
2. Check hoses and connections (chapter 9.2.16).
9.2.18 Change of detector cooling fluid every five years

Preparation
Make sure that you have the correct type of cooling fluid for the detector cooler. Use the detector
cooling fluid provided from Philips (part no. 1013399) that is delivered with the system. For the
Lauda detector cooler, 14.5 litres are needed to fill up the whole system. For the SMC detector
cooler, 7.5 litres are needed.
Always wear safety gloves and protective goggles when handling the water
Caution! coolant mixture.
Do not operate the detector cooler without enough cooling fluid in the tank.
1007989 O 55 (322)
Illustrations of Lauda detector cooler
Figure 32 Front panel of Lauda detector cooler. Level indicator (1), Lid to tank (2), Display with buttons
(3), ON/OFF power switch (4).
Figure 33 Back panel of Lauda detector cooler. Return hose (1), Outlet hose (2), Drain tap (3).
1007989 O 56 (322)
Illustrations of SMC detector cooler
Figure 34 Front panel of SMC detector cooler. Parts indicated in illustration are: level indicator (1), lid to
tank (2), run indicator (3), display for current temperature and alarm codes (4), display for
temperature set point (5).
Figure 35 Back panel of SMC detector cooler. Return hose (1), Outlet hose (2), Drain plug (3), ON/OFF
power switch (4).
(Note: The illustration shows a transport hose connected.)
1007989 O 57 (322)
Procedure Empty the detector cooler

1. Shut down the system.
2. Make sure that only the circuit breakers F2 and F16 are in status ON. All other circuit
breakers must be in status OFF.
4. If the foldable rails were removed for storage on site at installation, mount the rails back
on the rails in the side cabinet.
5. Pull out the detector cooler on the rails, see Figure 32and Figure 34 above.
6. If the Lauda detector cooler is used, place a vessel with a volume of at least 15 litres
below the tap on the back of the detector cooler. If the SMC cooler is used, place a vessel
with a volume of at least 8 litres and a height of maximum 160 mm below the rails.
7. Unscrew the tank lid on the front of the detector cooler.
8. Open the tap or plug on the back of the detector cooler and empty the cooling system.
9. Close the tap or plug.
Notice! Do not let the system remain empty longer than necessary.
Procedure Fill up the detector cooler

1. Turn OFF the circuit breaker, F10 (serving the detector cooler).
Make sure that you have the correct type of detector cooling fluid.
Note!
Use Detector cooling fluid (Part no 1013399).
2. Fill up the coolant system with fluid. If the SMC detector cooler is used, fill up to the
indicated maximum level. If the Lauda detector cooler is used, then fill up to at least the
midpoint between the minimum and maximum level.
3. Switch ON the circuit breaker F10.
4. Check all hoses and connections for leakage. In case of leakage, immediately turn the
cooler OFF and attend to the fault.
Be prepared to turn off the detector cooler if the fluid level runs below the
Caution!
indicated minimum level.
5. If necessary, fill up the coolant system with more fluid until the fluid level stabilizes and
all air has disappeared from the system and the hoses. Fill up to the indicated maximum
level.
1007989 O 58 (322)
6. Check that the temperature set point is set to 20C. If not, adjust the set point to 20C
according to the instructions in sections 10.5.1 or 10.6.4.
7. Screw the lid back on.
8. Roll the detector cooler back into the side cabinet.
9. Unscrew the four screws of the foldable rails, remove the rails and store them on site.
10. If the SMC detector cooler is used, screw the bracket holding the detector cooler back in
place.
1007989 O 59 (322)
9.2.19 Check the operating times of the SMC detector cooler

Illustration
Figure 36 The displays and buttons of the SMC detector cooler.
Check the accumulated operating time of the pump

1. Unlock the key-lock of the detector cooler, see section 10.6.2.
2. Press and hold the MENU key for 2 seconds until t.1 is shown in the PV display.
3. Press the SEL key seven times until PUMP is shown in the PV display.
4. Read the accumulated operating time of the pump on the SV display. The table below
describes how to interpret the shown information.
Check the accumulated operating time of the fan

3. Press the SEL key eight times until FAN is shown in the PV display.
4. Read the accumulated operating time of the fan on the SV display. The table below
describes how to interpret the shown information.
Check the accumulated operating time of the detector cooler

3. Press the SEL key ten times until dru. is shown in the PV display.
4. Read the accumulated operating time of the detector cooler on the SV display. The table
below describes how to interpret the shown information.
Interpretation of information on display

Information on display Accumulated operating time
0 h to 999 h 0 h to 999 h
1 hh to 99 hh 1 000 h to 99 999 h
The counter restarts at 0 h 100 000 h
1007989 O 60 (322)
9.2.20 Lubricate the Z-screw

Performed annually or when necessary, i.e. noisy movement or harsh mechanics.
Required equipment
Approximately 5 cm2 of lubricant SKF LGMT2 (1013019).
Preparation
Clean the screw using a clean dry cloth.
Procedure
1. Apply grease on different places on the screw. A total volume of 5 cm2 of the lubricant is
suitable.
2. Run the nut in order to ensure that the grease is applied everywhere.
9.2.21 Lubricate the scan, collimator and compression screws

Performed annually or when necessary, i.e. noisy movement or harsh mechanics.
Required equipment
Scan screw: Grease KSS MSG No1 Lithium (1015566).
Collimator screw: Grease KSS MSG No1 Lithium (1015566).
Compression screw: SKF LGMT2 (1013019).
Preparation
Clean the screw using a clean dry cloth.
Procedure
1. Apply grease on different places on the screw.
2. Run the nut in order to ensure that the grease is applied everywhere.
1007989 O 61 (322)
9.2.22 Check oil levels of the motor housing

Performed annually
Preparation
Open left and right side door.
Figure 37 Sight glass oil level.

Left: Z-height worm gear.
Right: C-rotation worm gear.
Procedure
Visually check the oil levels of the internal worm-gear for Z-height and C-rotation. The oil level
should be up to at least the middle of the sight glass. If the oil level is lower, contact product
support.
The oil volume for the Z-height rotation worm gear is 15 cl and the oil volume for the C-rotation
worm gear is 65 cl.
Note Under normal circumstances the oil level should not change over time.
1007989 O 62 (322)
9.2.23 Air purge and oil level adjustment of X-ray system

Interval
Purge the oil system of the X-ray system annually, and also before and after replacement of the X-
ray tube, see section 13.4.
Tools and material

Purge kit
Oil to purge kit, 1 liter
Allen key
Strap to fasten hose
Description of purge kit

The purge kit consists of an oil can with three connections; oil inlet, oil outlet and an air valve.
The purge kit shall be transported in the designated case. When filling the oil can with oil, the
purge kit can be placed in the foam of the case.
Figure 38 Main parts of purge kit: (1) Oil can, (2) Air valve, (3) Oil inlet, (4) Oil outlet.
Preparation
Let the system cool down for at least 30 minutes with the oil pump running before the air purge
procedure starts.
1007989 O 63 (322)
Prepare purge kit

1. Unscrew the lid of the oil can.
2. Fill the oil can of the purge kit with 0.6-0.7 liters of oil.
3. Screw the lid tightly onto the oil can.

4. Make sure that the air valve of the purge kit is fully tightened to avoid oil leakage.
5. Remove all air from the outlet oil hose of the purge kit:
a. Connect the male connector of the outlet hose to the female connector of the inlet
hose.
1007989 O 64 (322)
b. Fill the outlet oil hose with oil by tilting the purge kit.
c. Disconnect the connectors of the outlet and inlet hoses. Make sure that no air is
introduced to the outlet oil hose.
Prepare system
1. If covers are mounted to the system, remove the face protection shield, the C-arm front
cover and the two C-arm side covers, see sections 8.4 and 8.6.
2. Open the side doors of the main cabinet.
3. Rotate the C-arm to +45 and keep this position for at least 10 minutes with the oil pump
running.
4. Remove the bracket holding the cables from the X-ray tube.
5. Secure the oil outlet hose of the X-ray tube with a cable strap.
6. Open SCS Calibration Tool and select Settings / Reset SCS - Calibration Mode (No start
movements).
7. Switch OFF the circuit breaker F13 to stop the oil pump.
8. Rotate the C-arm to -45 and lower it to the lowest position.
Perform air purge

1. Hook the purge kit onto the main cabinet. Use the topmost hole of the main cabinet frame.
2. Disconnect the oil outlet hose from the X-ray tube.
1007989 O 65 (322)
3. Connect the purge kit to the connectors of the oil outlet hose of the X-ray tube.
4. Switch ON the circuit breaker F13 to start the oil pump.

5. Carefully shake the X-ray tube and the hoses to release air bubbles stuck to the material.
6. Leave the oil pump running for 10 minutes to make sure all air is removed from the
system. During this time, switch the circuit breaker F13 ON and OFF a couple of times to
make sure all air is released from the system.
Adjust oil level

1. Make sure that the C-arm is rotated to -45 and is in the lowest position.
2. Switch OFF the circuit breaker F13 to stop the oil pump.
3. Open the air valve of the air purge kit slowly. Oil is now flowing from the purge kit to the
oil system of the X-ray tube. Wait until the oil level in the purge kit is stable.
4. Move the C-arm to the highest possible position. Oil is now flowing from the oil system
of the X-ray tube to the purge kit. Wait until the oil level in the purge kit is stable.
5. Close the air valve of the purge kit.
Reset system
1. Disconnect the oil hoses of the purge kit from the connectors of the oil outlet hose of the
X-ray tube.
2. Unhook the air purge kit from the main cabinet.
3. Reconnect the outlet oil hose to the X-ray tube.
4. Remove the cable straps from the outlet hose of the X-ray tube.
5. Reattach the bracket holding the cables of the X-ray tube.
6. Switch ON the circuit breaker F13 to start the oil pump.
7. Reassemble the face protection shield, the C-arm front cover and the two C-arm side
covers, see sections 8.4 and 8.6.
8. Close the side doors of the main cabinet.
1007989 O 66 (322)
9. In the SCS Calibration Tool, select Settings / Reset SCS Normal Mode.
10. If you are to purge several systems within a short period of time the oil can be reused for
up to five systems. When finished, dispose of the used oil according to local regulations.
1007989 O 67 (322)
10. System adjustments

10.1 Stand Control System (SCS) configurations
This section describes the configuration and calibration procedures for the Stand Control System
(SCS).
10.1.1 Preparations
1. Start the AW-computer.
2. Log in as MDM Administrator
3. Start the application SCS Calibration Tool (found under the menu Start / Sectra.)
4. Enter the password Mamea.
10.1.2 Control of Load Cells, Motor PWM and Motor Encoders

This section describes how to check the load cells for the C-arm rotation and height, how to run
motors manually and verify that encoders and load cells are working properly.
Figure 39 Control of Load Cells, Motor PWM and Motor Encoders.
Procedure
1. Choose the Runtime tab.
2. Check that a value (~ 25000-40000) exists for Loadcell Z and that it changes more than
1000 units when the C-arm is pressed upwards/downwards hard, but without breaking the
covers.
3. Check that a value (~ 25000-40000) exists for Loadcell C and that it changes more than
1000 units when the C-arm is pressed right/left hard on the top of the C-arm, but without
breaking the covers.
1007989 O 68 (322)
Check motor direction and encoder.

a. Choose PWM.
b. Set Increment to 10 under PWM.
c. Choose motor C-rotation. Press on any of the on-screen up/down arrows until the
motor starts to move.
d. While moving, check that the movement is performed in the correct direction and
that the position is updated correctly. Arrow-up shall make the C-arm rotate
clockwise and the position shall increase. For a more advanced encoder function
control, see section 20.11.
e. (C-rotation and Height) If the motor for C-rotation (Height) is running check the
value of the potentiometer and that it changes significantly (>200mV) when
rotating left/right (moving up/down). For a more advanced potentiometer function
control see section 20.10.
f. Press Stop in order to stop the movement.
g. Repeat steps a) to f) in a similar way for the remaining motors:
Compression - Arrow-up shall make the compression move upwards and the
position shall increase.
Height - Arrow-up shall make the C-arm move upwards and the position
shall increase.
Scan - Arrow-up shall make the scan arm move right and the position
shall increase.
Collimator - Arrow-up shall make the collimator move upwards and the
position shall decrease.
10.1.3 SCS Calibration Tool Buttons and Signals
Figure 40 Buttons and signals in the SCS Calibration Tool user interface (tab Runtime).
Buttons in the 24 V Power-box

Main and Main 2 = If both buttons are filled, both circuits controlled by the emergency stop
buttons are closed, i.e. in normal state.
LDO = If the button is filled all external interfaces are powered up.
(The state of the button might be useful when looking for short-circuits or faulty
connections in the main cabinet.)
The C-Rotation, Height, Compression, Scan and Collimator buttons have no functionality
for L30.
1007989 O 69 (322)
Signals
These signals are read from the SCS. For example in Figure 40 the signal DX_LIGHT is on which
means that the Dx indicator (light) is lit.
EM_STOP_SW1 Software emergency stop signal (for emergency
loop 1), used to force the SCS Unit into emergency
stop state from software.
OFF = Emergency stop active.
EM_STOP_SW2 Software emergency stop signal (for emergency
loop 2), used to force the SCS Unit into emergency
stop state from software.
OFF = Emergency stop active.
DX_LIGHT State of Dx-button lamp on patient support.
SIN_LIGHT State of Sin-button lamp on patient support.
GEN_SHUTDOWN OFF = The HVG is powered down
GEN_ENABLE ON = HVG enable, i.e. exposure possible
GEN_EXPOSURE ON = Exposure signal is on
DISPLAY_DIR N/A (Not used in L30)
HW_BOOT ON = Emulate a button press of SW4 (reset button
at the top of the SCS Unit)
WATCHDOG_SET Signal to reset the hardware watchdog of the SCS
WATCHDOG Service pulse from SCS software to the watchdog
that shows that the software is alive
Z_UNLOCK_BRAKE ON = Z-brake unlocked
C_UNLOCK_BRAKE ON = C-brake unlocked (Not used on L30)
24V_POWER ON = Power to motors is on (not height and
compression)
24V_POWER2 ON = Power to height and compression motor is
on
LDO_POWER_GOOD ON = Power to external interfaces (4.8V, e.g.
encoders) is ok
SW_RESET Software reset (not implemented)
COMPRESSION_PLATE_PRESEN ON = Compression paddle mounted (not
T implemented in mechanics)
STEREO_NEEDLE_SWITCH N/A
STEREO_SWITCH_AUX N/A
COLLIMATOR_PRESENT ON = Collimator mounted (not implemented in
mechanics)
STEREO_UNIT_PRESENT ON = Stereo unit mounted and powered up
CP_ID_1N
CP_ID_2N N/A
CP_ID_3N (Compression paddle identification not implemented
CP_ID_4N at present.)
CP_ID_5N
CP_ID_DATA N/A
(Data from compression ID circuit.)
TP8
N/A
TP9
(Used for testing.)
TP10
1007989 O 70 (322)
Buttons
These buttons control the stand. For example in Figure 40 the buttons Side Dx and Light are
pressed. Thus the Dx-button on patient support is illuminated and the working light of the stand is
lit.
Exposure 1
Corresponds to the exposure buttons on the AW
Exposure 2
table and the optional exposure pedal.
Exposure 3
C Rotation Right Corresponds to the rotation right buttons on each
keypad on the C-arm.
C Rotation Left Corresponds to the rotation left buttons on each
Height Up Corresponds to the rotation left buttons on each
Height Down Corresponds to the C-arm up-buttons on each
Compression Done Corresponds to the compression done buttons on
the lower keypads of the C-arm and the
compression pedals.
Compression Up Corresponds to the compression up buttons on the
compression pedals.
Compression Down Corresponds to the compression down buttons on
the compression pedals.
Side Sin Corresponds to the Sin (left) button on the patient
support.
Side Dx Corresponds to the Dx (right) button on the patient
support.
Emergency Corresponds to the first loop of emergency stop
switches.
Emergency (2) Corresponds to the second loop of emergency stop
switches.
Light Corresponds to the light buttons of the upper
keypads of the C-arm.
Button 1 Corresponds to the three buttons on the SCS board
Button 2 lower side. Button 1 is the button to the left. See
Button 3 section 20.4.2.
1007989 O 71 (322)
10.1.4 Advanced mode and different types of reset

Below is an explanation of Advanced mode and the different reset options under the drop down
menu Settings in the SCS Calibration Tool.
Advanced mode Advanced mode opens a number of parameters for

editing (and a tab, Scan, for developers).
In advanced mode, parameters marked with a
blue arrow can be edited (the arrow disappears).
Parameters marked with a red arrow are always
read-only and cannot be edited.
Reset SCS Software Resets the SCS to normal mode. (The same as
pressing the Reset-button on the stand.)
Reset SCS Hardware Loads the firmware from the two flash-memories
and resets the SCS (normal mode).
Reset SCS Normal Mode Resets the SCS to normal mode.
Reset SCS Calibration Mode Resets the SCS to calibration mode.
Reset SCS Calibration mode Resets the SCS to calibration mode, but with no
(No start movements) start movements.
1007989 O 72 (322)
10.1.5 Calibrations
Figure 41 shows the calibration tab in SCS Calibration Tool. The following sections describe how
to calibrate the SCS. Remember to make a backup of the configuration before performing any
calibrations, in case you need to roll back the changes.
Figure 41 Calibrations of the SCS in the SCS Calibration Tool.
Choose Reset SCS Calibration mode (No start movements) to avoid

movements at start-up, e.g. if stand movements are not working properly.
For a normal calibration Reset SCS Calibration Mode is enough and
Notice
should be chosen.
Always choose Reset SCS Hardware after performing multiple
calibrations.
Procedure
1. Choose Reset SCS Calibration Mode (under the
menu Settings). See Figure 42.
2. Choose the tab Calibration, see Figure 41.
3. It is recommended that the calibrations are performed
in the order Motor Currents, Height Position, C-
Rotation Position, Height Collision, Rotation
Collision, Scan, Collimator Height, Collimator
Collision, Compression Height, Compression Switch
and Compression Force.
4. It is, of course, possible to perform only one or more Figure 42 Reset SCS -
of the calibrations if necessary. E.g. if the collimator Calibration Mode
has been modified, calibrations Collimator Height and
Collimator Collision should be performed.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions. (See also more detailed instructions for each calibration
in the following sections.)
1007989 O 73 (322)
10.1.6 Motor Currents

This calibration will calibrate the current measurement sensors for the compression and collimator
motors.
The Motor Currents calibration will invalidate the previous calibration of

the compression current and the collimator motor current. This means that
Notice
the Collimator Collision protection and the Compression Force need to be
re-calibrated.
Preparation
Read the instructions in section 10.1.1.
Remove the display cover as described in section 8.5 in order to access the SCS.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Motor Currents (in Figure 41).
2. Follow the on-screen instructions given by the program carefully.
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Motor Currents ended > is printed in
the log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE]
indicating whether the calibration was successful or not.
1007989 O 74 (322)
10.1.7 Height Position

This calibration will calibrate the C-arm height positioning sensors.
The Height calibration will perform an automated movement whereas the

Notice
C-arm is raised to its highest position and lowered to its lowest position.
Preparation
Make sure that the upper front surface of the patient support is exactly one meter above the
floor, see Figure 43.
Figure 43 Positioning of the C-arm for height calibration.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Height (in Figure 41).
2. Follow the instructions given by the program carefully.
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Height ended > is printed in the log
window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE] indicating
whether the calibration was successful or not.
4. Test Collision protection for the C-arm height movement (chapter 9.2.12).
1007989 O 75 (322)
10.1.8 C-Rotation Position

This calibration will calibrate the C-arm rotation positioning sensors.
The C-Rotation calibration will perform an automated movement whereas

Notice
the C-arm is rotated back and forth.
Preparation
Make sure the C-arm is in angle zero (0) degrees. Use (for example) a water level.
Procedure
1. Click on the button C-Rotation (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of C-Rotation ended > is printed in the
log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE] indicating
4. Test Collision protection for the C-arm rotation movement (chapter 9.2.13).
1007989 O 76 (322)
10.1.9 Height Collision

This calibration will calibrate the C-arm height collision protection system.
The Height Collision calibration will perform an automated movement

Notice whereas the C-arm is raised to its highest position and lowered to its
lowest position.
Preparation
A Height calibration (10.1.7) shall have been performed before this calibration.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Height Collision (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Height Collision ended > is printed in
the log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE]
4. Test Collision protection for the C-arm height movement (chapter 9.2.12).
10.1.10 C-Rotation Collision

This calibration will calibrate the C-arm rotation collision protection system.
The C-Rotation Collision calibration will perform an automated

Notice
movement whereas the C-arm is rotated back and forth.
Preparation
A Height calibration (10.1.7) and a C-Rotation calibration (10.1.8) shall have been performed
before this calibration.
Procedure
1. Click on the button C-Rotation Collision (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of C-Rotation Collision ended > is
printed in the log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or
[FAILURE] indicating whether the calibration was successful or not.
4. Test Collision protection for the C-arm rotation movement (chapter 9.2.13).
1007989 O 77 (322)
10.1.11 Collimator Height

This calibration will determine the maximum mechanical position of the collimator mechanics.
The Collimator Height calibration will perform an automated movement

Notice
whereas the collimator is moved down without any collision protection.
Preparation
Remove the compression paddle.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Collimator Height (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Collimator Height ended > is printed
in the log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE]
10.1.12 Collimator Collision

This calibration will calibrate the collimator collision protection.
The Collimator Collision calibration will perform automated movements

Notice whereas the collimator will be moved down and up (without any collision
protection) and the C-arm rotated back and forth.
Preparation
Procedure
1. Click on the button Collimator Collision (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Collimator Collision ended > is
4. Test Collision protection for the collimator movement (section 9.2.11).
1007989 O 78 (322)
10.1.13 Scan Length

This calibration will determine the mechanical max position for the scan mechanics.
The Scan calibration will perform an automated movement whereas the

Notice
scan is moved right without any collision protection.
Preparation
Procedure
1. Click on the button Scan (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Scan ended > is printed in the log
window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE] indicating
10.1.14 Compression Height

This calibration will determine the mechanical max position for the compression mechanics.
The Compression Height calibration will perform an automated movement

Notice
whereas the compression will be moved down.
Preparation
Procedure
1. Click on the button Compression Height (in Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when < Calibration of Compression Height ended > is
4. Calibrate each of the compression paddles (chapter 11.3.8).
1007989 O 79 (322)
10.1.15 Compression Switch

This calibration will calibrate the compression force switch that is responsible for the mechanical
over-compression safety switch.
The Compression Switch calibration will perform automated movements

whereas the compression will be moved up and down and the C-arm
Notice rotated back and forth. It will compress until it goes into reset, if not lower
the position of the dynamometer alternatively hold by hand 10mm of
PMMA on top of the patient support before compression begins.
Preparation
Remove the C-arm covers to be able to adjust the compression switch.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Compression Switch (see Figure 41).
3. The calibration is finished when the text < Calibration of Compression Force Switch
ended > is printed in the log window. The string is followed by either [SUCCESS] or
10.1.16 Compression Force

This calibration will calibrate the compression force sensor.
The Compression Force calibration will perform automated movements

Notice whereas the compression will be moved down and up and the C-arm
rotated back and forth.
Preparation
Attach the compression force measurement tool to the machine.
Procedure
1. Click on the button Compression Force (in Figure 41).
3. The system runs a calibration which is finished when the text
< Calibration of Compression Force ended > is shown in the log window. The string is
followed by either [SUCCESS] or [FAILURE] indicating whether the calibration was
successful or not.
1007989 O 80 (322)
10.1.17 Axis burn in

This function of the SCS Calibration Tool can be used in order to perform loops of the c-rotation
movement, compression movement, height movement, scan movement or collimator movement
when, for example, investigating noise.
Notice Note that the motor temperature is not monitored by the system.
Preparation
The axis (motor) for which to perform the axis burn in must be calibrated.
Procedure
1. Click on the Axis Burn In button in the Burn In group.
Figure 44 Start and stop button.
2. Choose the desired axis by entering a value between 0 and 4. Press Enter.
Figure 45 Enter desired axis.
3. Enter the number of test cycles. Press Enter. (20 cycles is the default value. One cycle =
back and forth.)
Figure 46 Enter number of cycles.
4. Enter the waiting time between moves. Press Enter.

(5 seconds is default. 0 is not recommended.)
Figure 47 Enter waiting time.
1007989 O 81 (322)
5. Decide whether to save data to log file. If Yes, choose file name to save log data to.
Figure 48 Save data to log file.
6. If Yes, choose the file name to save log data to and which data to log.
Figure 49 Select which data to log.
7. Press Yes to proceed.
Figure 50 Start or abort burn in cycle.
8. The operation is finished when < Axis burn in test cycle finished > is printed in the log-
in window.
Do not run the motors so hot that they cannot be touched. Preferably use
Caution!
default values for number of test cycles and waiting time.
1007989 O 82 (322)
10.1.18 Test Cycle Burn In
Procedure
1. Choose the tab Calibration and press Test Cycle Burn In, see Figure 51. Test Cycle Burn
In takes approximately 1 hour 40 minutes.
Figure 51 Starting burn in test cycle.

2. The burn in test cycle can be performed without compression paddle and compressed
object. However compression will not be tested. (The compression paddle will stop on a
certain height.)
If testing of compression is desired but no suitable object is available, the spot
compression paddle can be used. In that case, mount the spot compression paddle upon
request for compression object.
1007989 O 83 (322)
10.1.19 Exam Test Cycle

This burn in is similar to Test Cycle Burn In, but more advanced. It will simulate smartAEC
movements and provide better real life patient simulations.
Procedure
1. Choose the tab Calibration and press Exam Test Cycle, see the figure below. Exam Test
Cycle takes approximately 15 minutes.
Figure 52 Starting exam test cycle.

2. The exam test cycle needs a compression paddle and compressed object since it simulates
real-life compression. Use a soft spongy material and fix it to the object table (must be
fixed, the stand rotates during the test cycle).
10.1.20 C-Rot Collision Test

This is a self diagnostic test for the C-arm rotation collision protection system. It will perform a
series of movements to detect if the collision protection system is susceptible to false collisions.
Procedure
Start the test by clicking the C-Rot Collision Test button. Make sure that the stand can rotate
freely.
1007989 O 84 (322)
10.2 Changing SCS parameters

10.2.1 General description of changing SCS Parameters
Preparation
Follow section 10.1.1.
Procedure
1. Choose the tab Parameters. Make sure Automatic update (in the lower right corner) is
checked.
2. Click on Save to file in order to make a backup of the parameters.

3. Double click on the desired group of parameters (see below) in order to expand the list
and show the parameter settings.
4. Double click on the parameter you want to alter.

5. Note: Parameters marked with a blue arrow are protected unless you are in advanced
mode. Do not change any of these parameters unless by direct order. Parameters
marked with a red arrow are read-only and cannot be changed manually.
6. Enter the desired value in the dialog box. Click OK.
7. If not Automatic update is checked, click on button Set Parameters.
8. Click Store Permanently.
9. Perform a normal reset, i.e. press the Reset-button on the mammography stand or
click on Reset SCS (on the Parameters tab) or choose menu option Settings Reset SCS
Software (or Settings Reset SCS Normal Mode).
10. Make a backup of the configuration according to section 16.3.
11. Exit the SCS Calibration tool by closing the window.
Choose Reset SCS Calibration mode (No start movements) to avoid

movements at start-up, e.g. if stand movements are not working properly.
Notice
Always perform Settings Reset SCS Hardware after loading a
backup file of the SCS parameters.
1007989 O 85 (322)
10.2.2 Change C-arm rotation speed

Preparation
Procedure
Follow the instructions in section 10.2.1 where the group C_Rot should be chosen followed by the
parameter MaxSpeed.
1000 (= 10/second) is the default value of MaxSpeed. (MaxSpeed is in 1/100 /second.)
Note: Do not change MaxSpeed to a value larger than the default value (1000).
10.2.3 Change height motor speed

Preparation
Procedure
Follow the instructions in section 10.2.1 where the group Height should be chosen followed by the
parameter HighSpeed and/or LowSpeed.
50 and 25 mm/s respectively are the default values.
10.2.4 Change compression paddle home position

Preparation
Procedure
Follow the instructions in section 10.2.1, choose the group Compression followed by the
parameter HomePosition.
The default value shown in SCS Calibration Tool is 1410, representing the compression paddle
distance from patient support in 0.1 mm increments, and corresponds to 141 mm.
Adjust the value for desired new home position.
By measuring check the gap between high edge compression paddle and the face shield is not less
than 72 mm, compression paddle returned to home position as in normal operation.
Avoiding pinch risk when compression paddle automatically returns to

home position, the distance between the high edge compression paddle and
Caution!
the face shield must not be less than 72 mm when compression paddle in
home position.
10.3 Change dose configuration

The dose configuration is changed in the Service Tool, see section 11.10.1 for instructions.
1007989 O 86 (322)
10.4 Change laterality

By default the system uses the terms Sin and Dx for laterality. See ref [2], AW System
Administrators Guide, for instructions on how to change to L and R.
10.5 Detector cooler Lauda (1010595)
Figure 53 The display and buttons of the detector cooler.

out 1 is illuminated if the relay out 1 is on, e.g. when the compressor is activated.
Alarm is illuminated if an alarm has occurred, i.e. if the thermostat probe has indicated values
outside the programmed values.
10.5.1 Display and modify temperature set point

Follow these steps to modify the set point:
1. Press . The display shows SP 1.
2. Press again.
3. Use the and keys to choose the desired temperature.
4. The value is stored by pressing or . (The value is stored automatically after 15

seconds if none of the keys are pressed.)
5. Press or .
No other parameters should be set or altered in the detector cooler.
It is not possible to define max and min alarm set points on the Lauda detector cooler.
10.5.2 Display and Error code E1

The only possible error code on the display of the Lauda detector cooler is E1.
E1 = Temperature sensor fault caused by one of the following:
Registered temperatures
Sensor short circuit
Sensor open circuit
1007989 O 87 (322)
10.6 Detector cooler SMC (1018944)
Figure 54 The displays and buttons of the SMC detector cooler.
10.6.1 Start and stop the detector cooler

To start and stop the detector cooler, press the RUN/STOP button and hold for 2 seconds. The
RUN lamp lights in green when the detector cooler is running. When the detector cooler is stopped
the RUN lamp flashes and the operation continues until the detector cooler is ready to shut down.
After approximately 10 seconds the detector cooler shuts down and the RUN lamp goes off.
10.6.2 Unlock or lock the keys

In order to prevent that set values are changed by mistake, the key-lock of the detector cooler is
activated at delivery. If the key or the key is pressed when the key-lock is activated,
LOCK is displayed in the SV display.
To change the key-lock setting, follow the instruction below:
2. Press and hold the MENU key for 2 seconds once again until SE.01 is shown in the PV
display.
3. Press the or key to until ON or OFF is shown on the SV display.
ON = key lock is enabled. OFF = key lock is disabled.
4. Wait for 3 seconds while the setting stabilizes.
5. Press the MENU key once to save the performed setting and return to the main display.
10.6.3 Reset an alarm

When an alarm occurs the ALARM lamp flashes, an alarm buzzer sounds and the alarm number is
displayed on the PV display.
To reset the alarm, follow the instruction below:
2. Press the and keys simultaneously.
10.6.4 Display and modify temperature set point

The set value of circulating fluid temperature is displayed in the SV display. Press the and
keys to change the set point to the desired value.
1007989 O 88 (322)
10.7 Field limiter

10.7.1 Verifying the position of the field limiter
Preparations
Ensure that any objects are removed from the patient support.
Use standard compression paddle or no compression paddle.
Procedure
1. Start the Service Tool, choose the tab Service and click the Field limiter scan button.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
3. The result is shown by the upper right colour indicator boxes in the Field Limiter
dialog, see Figure 55. If the middle main indicator is green, the field limiter is good. If the
indicator is red, the field limiter needs to be adjusted, see 10.7.2.
Figure 55 Field limiter scan. The over-all result is shown by the upper right color indicator
boxes. For the main indicator to be green, the gradient (from gray to black) created by
the field limiter must be located within the red continuous lines throughout the whole
image height. When adjusting the field limiter, the gradient should be located within
the dashed lines that appear when checking Adjustment, see 10.7.2.
1007989 O 89 (322)
10.7.2 Adjusting the field limiter

Preparations
Ensure that any objects are removed from the patient support.
Make sure that the field limiter needs adjustment, see 10.7.1.
Remove X-ray prevent cover as described in section 8.1.
Remove C-arm covers as described in section 8.6.
Position the scan arm in vertical position (in order to reach the screws adjusting the field
limiter).
Use Standard compression paddle or no compression paddle.
Procedure
1. Loosen the four screws, see Figure 56. Then tighten them again, the front screws first.
Always tighten the front screw before the back screw. Otherwise the
Note
software will have trouble guiding the adjustment.
Figure 56 Location of the four screws securing the field limiter under the X-ray tube.
2. Press Exposure in the Field Limiter dialog (or press File limiter scan in Service Tool).
Follow the on-screen instructions. Loosen the four screws (or two screws if only one side
of the field limiter needs to be adjusted). See Figure 56.
3. Loosen the four screws (or two screws if only one side of the field limiter needs to be
adjusted). See Figure 56.
1007989 O 90 (322)
4. Adjust the field limiter according to the instructions in the Field limiter dialog using the
two adjustment screws on each side. See Figure 57.
Figure 57 Screws for adjusting the field limiter.

The illustration shows the two screws on the right side of the C-arm. These shall be adjusted
according to the right screw pictures in the dialog.
5. Tighten the four screws (see Figure 56), the front screws first.
Always tighten the front screw before the rear screw. Otherwise the
Note
software will have trouble guiding the adjustment.
6. Press Exposure in the Field Limiter dialog. Follow the on-screen instructions.
7. If the main indicator is red, repeat from step 3 until the indicator is green.
8. If the tube has two filaments and it is desired to adjust the field limiter with respect to
both filaments (optional), perform the instruction in section 10.7.3. Otherwise, continue
with step 9.
9. Reassemble the C-arm covers.
10. Re-assemble the X-ray prevent cover.
11. Perform Tests after maintenance or service according to chapter 14.
1007989 O 91 (322)
10.7.3 Adjusting the field limiter for two filaments (optional)

For adjustment of the field limiter with respect to both filaments, perform steps 1-6 in section
10.7.2 with filament 0 selected (see section 13.5), continue with the steps below and end with
steps 8 -10 in section 10.7.2.
1. Press Done in the Field limiter dialog. Change filament to 1 (see section 13.5,
steps 1-3), and restart the CCS.
2. Press Field limiter scan in the Service Tool.
3. If the result indicator is green, go to step 4. If the result indicator is red, adjust the screw
with the half of the proposed value. That is, if the proposed value for one screw is 20 min
clockwise, adjust 10 min clockwise. Proceed until the field limiter is good enough, i.e. the
result indicator is green.
4. Press Done in the Field limiter dialog. Change filament to 0 (see section 13.5,
steps 1-3) and restart the CCS.
5. Press Field limiter scan in the Service Tool. If the result indicator is green, click Done
the field limiter is adjusted for both filaments. If the result indicator is red, adjust
according to the on-screen instructions until the result indicator is green the field limiter
could not be adjusted for both filaments.
10.8 Compression paddles

See ref [2] for information about how to;
Configure default compression paddle.
Configure standard compression paddle.
Configure keep compression paddle. (The selected compression paddle remains chosen
until the user chooses a different compression paddle.)
1007989 O 92 (322)
10.9 Compression height limit determination

Follow the instruction below to determine and configure the correct compression height limit.
1. Make sure that the current user is the MDM Administrator.
2. Reset the stand if necessary.
3. Remove the compression paddle.
4. Start the Service Tool and select Warm up tube (found under Calibrations on the Normal
tab). Press Compression Done.
Use a caliper to measure the height between the bottom of the collimator and the centre of
the patient support. Be careful not to scratch the collimator or the patient support.
The distance is expected to be in the range 105 mm to 108 mm.
5. Subtract 3 mm from the measured value. Round to the closest integer below. This number
is the compression height limit for the standard and the high edge compression paddles.
1007989 O 93 (322)
6. Place a file compHeightLimit.def in C:\Program Files\

Sectra\CCS\local_config with the following content:
CompressionPaddles {
Standard {
compHeightLimit = NNN
}
High Edge {
compHeightLimit = NNN
}
}
The number NNN shall be replaced by the determined compression height limit with the
following considerations:
If the determined compression height limit is below 100 mm, NNN shall be set to
100.
If a file with the same content is already present, modify the existing file.
If the determined compression height limit is 104 mm or above, do not create any
file. If a file with this content is already present, delete the file.
Examples:
If the measured distance between the patient support and the collimator is 105.8
mm, the compression height limit is 102 mm and NNN shall be set to 102.
If the measured distance is below 104 mm, NNN shall be set to 100.
If the measured distance is above 107 mm, there shall be no file present with this
content.
7. Abort the Warm up tube procedure by pressing Cancel in the Warm up tube procedure
dialog. Press Yes to acknowledge aborting.
8. Save the file and restart the CCS. This can be done by pressing Reboot CCS on the
Service tab.
9. Open the file C:\Program Files\Sectra\CCS\Log\
actual_config.log and search for the parameter compHeightLimit. Make sure that the
values for the standard and high edge paddles is in accordance with the local
configuration created in step 7.
1007989 O 94 (322)
11. Service Tool

11.1 General
11.1.1 Password
The password for starting the Service Tool is Mamea.
11.1.2 Main window

In the left column in Figure 58 there is a status field. It may state that All calibrations are up to
date, or These calibrations are not valid, in which case a list is shown of calibrations that need
to be performed.
Figure 58 Service Tool main window with Normal tab selected.
Figure 59 Service Tool main window with Service tab selected.
1007989 O 95 (322)
11.2 Normal Calibrations

The calibrations described in this section are performed during ordinary use and can all be
selected from the Normal tab in the Service Tool main window.
Full calibration, Quick calibration and Tube warmup can be started directly from the AWS menu
without requiring a password.
11.2.1 Full calibration

Why?
A Full calibration measures the X-ray response of all detector channels using a step-wedge
phantom and calculates correction factors to make the response equal and disables detector
channels that do not have sufficient performance. This ensures pixel homogeneity in the slit
direction. The X-ray response depends on many parameters besides the detector such as the X-ray
tube output and heel-effect, the collimator, compression paddle and patient support.
When?
Once a week, or if Quick calibration fails.
11.2.2 Quick calibration

Why?
Quick calibration uses the step-wedge phantom to locate and disable deviating channels in the
detector. This calibration includes a history function which is used to detect unstable channels in a
robust fashion. If a problem is remedied, the Quick calibration may need to be performed
repeatedly before the effects are apparent in the channel mask.
When?
A Quick calibration should be performed when a line artefact occurs. See example in section
18.2.1.
11.2.3 Tube warmup

Why?
To minimize the risk for arcing in the X-ray tube, a controlled exposure sequence should be
performed to warm up the X-ray tube before starting examinations.
When?
When four hours have passed since the last exposure was performed, the AWS will recommend
warming up the X-ray tube using this procedure.
1007989 O 96 (322)
11.2.4 Clear history

Why?
This calibration removes history data used by the Full and Quick calibrations. The history data can
be recovered by performing repeated Quick calibrations.
When?
If Full calibration or Quick calibration fails because of previous problems which have now been
resolved, this step may be required. The channels which are masked because of the history
function are shown in the Channel mask viewer as Check history, see section 11.8.
1007989 O 97 (322)
11.3 Service calibrations

Notice Calibrations must only be performed by personnel certified by Philips.
11.3.1 Asic calibration

This calibration is usually needed only once / during production.
Notice
Only perform this calibration when requested by product support.
Asic calibration trims the amplifier settings for the ASICs in the detector. The calibration is
performed without X-ray exposure.
Procedure Perform calibration

1. Click on Asic in the Service Tool, under the Service tab.
2. A progress bar is shown and the current step is indicated, for example Calibrating Vrst.
Figure 60 Progress bar for Calibrating Vrst.
3. The user is informed whether the calibration was successful or not.

4. The status field is updated.
5. It is advisable to check the channel mask after this calibration, especially if the calibration
was unsuccessful.
Procedure Calibrations and outgoing controls

1. Perform a Full calibration according to Quality Control Procedures [1].
2. According to Quality Control Procedures [1], perform the following controls:
a. Daily quality control
b. X-ray tube output (Air kerma)
c. Contrast-to-noise ratio
d. AEC system: Breast thickness and exposure
3. It is also recommended to perform.the test Contrast detail resolution according to Quality
Control Procedures [1],
See section 20.3 for information regarding handling failed calibrations.
1007989 O 98 (322)
11.3.2 Automatic collimator alignment

Automatic collimator alignment (ACA) is the tool that is used to align the pre-collimator with the
detector. (A Geometry calibration must be performed after a Collimator alignment.)
Procedure
1. Press Emergency stop and
lower the collimator by hand.
2. Mount the lower part of the
ACA mechanics, see Figure
61. The lower part is attached
to the pre collimator assembly
by two Allen screws.
3. Loosen (do not remove) the
three screws holding the
collimator to its base, see
Figure 62. In what follows,
we refer to these as the Figure 61 The upper ACA mechanics is mounted on the so
alignment screws. You should called interface position. The lower ACA
now be able to move the mechanics is attached to the pre collimator
collimator in all directions. assembly. (The X-ray prevent cover is not
4. Tighten the alignment screws visible in this illustration.)
to 1.2 Nm or by hand until
there is no vertical play
when you pull the
collimator front up and
down. The collimator
should however still be
possible to move by
hand from left to right.
5. Mount the upper part(s)
of the ACA mechanics.
You may need to move
the collimator left/right
in order for the parts to
fit in each other. Apply
the springs (see A in
Figure 61) and check
that the collimator
position can be adjusted Figure 62 The three alignment screws of the collimator.
by turning the knobs.
6. Adjust both screw micrometers to the starting position:
10 mm for blue ACA (revision C or later).
13 mm for silver ACA (revision B or earlier).
7. Connect the power cable and the computer cable.
1007989 O 99 (322)
8. Release the emergency stop and perform a reset. If the X-ray prevent cover is mounted,
make sure that it is attached to the collimator interface during the reset.
Make sure that no part of the ACA mechanics collide with anything during
Notice the Reset. Otherwise the homing of the collimator movement will be
incorrect and the alignment useless.
9. Click on System Configuration (see Figure 59) in the Service Tool, under the tab Service.
Check that the Detector S/N is correct. If it is not correct, enter the correct one and click
OK.
10. Click Collimator Alignment (see Figure 59) in the Service Tool, under the tab Service to
start ACA.
11. Click OK. The ACA motor starts the homing procedure, and the collimator can be seen to
move slowly in the left/right direction.
Figure 63 Detector analyzer display, after Exposure has been pressed.
12. Click Exposure. See Figure 63. Wait for

the motor to find its start position, press
Compression Done and expose.
13. Follow the instructions on screen.
14. When instructed to tighten the alignment
screws, tighten them to 5,7 Nm.
Figure 64 Confirm that the screws are
15. When instructed to loosen the alignment loosened before moving the
screws, loosen them as in step 4. Then motor.
adjust the knobs. Finally check Screws are
made loose and click Move motor. See Figure 64.
As the screws are tightened, you must not move the motor! Therefore, at
Notice
this stage, be sure not to check Screws are made loose.
1007989 O 100 (322)

16. If the tube has two filaments and it is desired to align the pre-collimator with respect to
both filaments (optional), perform the instruction in section 11.3.3. Otherwise, continue
with step 17.
17. When the alignment is good enough (all indicators are green), click Done.
18. Disconnect and remove the ACA mechanics.
19. Perform a Geometry calibration. See section 11.3.5.
It is important that a Geometry calibration is performed after Collimator

Notice
alignment.
See section 20.3.1 for an alignment trouble shooting guide.
11.3.3 Alignment for two filaments (optional)

To align the pre-collimator with respect to two filaments, perform steps 1-15 in section 11.3.2
with filament 0 selected (see section 13.5), continue with the steps below and end with steps 17-19
in section 11.3.2.
1. When all indicators are green, change filament to 1 (see section 13.5, steps 1-3) and
restart the CCS.
2. Go to the Advanced tab and select Expose Still. Click Retry if a fail dialog appears.
3. In the Sequence drop list, change to Final still. In the View type drop list, select Overlay
view.
4. Go to the Alignment tab. If all indicators are green, go to step 5. If the alignment needs
improvement, make adjustments according to the proposal divided by two. That is, turn
the knobs with half of the indicated values and enter a value for the motor position that is
the mean of the proposed position and the previous position. The previous position can be
seen in the file name (screen dump). Proceed until the alignment is good enough, i.e. the
result indicator is green.
5. Change filament to 0 (see section 13.5, steps 1-3) and restart the CCS.
6. Go to the Advanced tab and select Expose Still. Click Retry if a fail dialog appears.
7. In the Sequence drop list, change to Final Still. In the View type drop list, select Overlay
view.
8. If all indicators are green, click Done the collimator is aligned for both filaments. If the
alignment is not good enough, adjust the alignment according to the on-screen instructions
the collimator could not be aligned for both filaments.
1007989 O 101 (322)

11.3.4 Verify alignment

The alignment of the collimator can be verified without using the ACA mechanics. The procedure
differs if full collimator alignment was performed with L30 SW 8.1 or earlier, in which case the
Verify Alignment dialog in Figure 66 will appear.
Procedure collimator alignment performed with 8.2 or later:

1. Click Verify Alignment (see Figure 59) in the Service Tool, under the tab Service.
2. Click on Exposure and expose. This is a reference exposure for the calculation. The X-ray
response should be uniform. If clipping is observed, check that the X-ray prevent cover is
correctly mounted.
3. Click on Exposure again and expose. The current margins are displayed and the alignment
is judged. If the indicator for left/right margin is red, a full collimator alignment has to be
performed. However, at 90 degrees red indicators are ok as long as the current left/right
margin is above 10 m.
Figure 65 Verify alignment. If the indicators are green, the alignment is good.
1007989 O 102 (322)

Procedure collimator alignment performed with 8.1 or earlier:

1. Click on Verify Alignment in the Service Tool, under the Service tab
(see Figure 59)
Figure 66 Verify Alignment dialog will appear if full collimator alignment was performed with
L30 SW 8.1 or earlier.
2. Verify that the Collimator height um is set to a positive number (it might be for example
235000). Click Exposure and expose.
3. Reduce the Collimator height um by 7000 um (following the example above, we should
set the height to 228000). Click Exposure and expose.
4. The green field (asics that are still counting at the same rate) should be properly centred
inside the blue fields (asics that count less). See example of correct alignment in Figure 67
(left). If the collimator is not aligned, see an example in Figure 67 (right), a full collimator
alignment has to be performed.
<80 um difference between left and right margin is an acceptable level of

accuracy.
Notice
If the difference is near 80 um, run a Daily quality control with the C-arm
in 0, +90 and -90 degrees angle respectively. No artefacts should be
visible.
1007989 O 103 (322)

Figure 67 Verify alignment.

Left: Good alignment
Right: Bad alignment
11.3.5 Geometry calibration

Geometry calibration sets the trig positions for readouts and determines the relative positions of
the sensors in the detector.
Procedure
1. Click on Geometry calibration in the Service Tool,
under the Service tab.
2. Place the Geometry and image field phantom on the
patient support. Compress. Press Compression Done
and hold down the exposure button.
3. A progress bar is shown and the current step is
indicated. Figure 68 Geometry phantom.
(Part no. 1012092)
4. The user is informed whether the calibration was
successful or not.
5. The status field is updated.
6. It is advisable to check the channel mask after this
calibration, especially if the calibration was unsuccessful.
If the Geometry calibration fails:
1. Verify that the phantom is correctly mounted on the patient support. The front guiding
edge of the phantom should touch the front end of the patient support.
2. Run Verify alignment.
1007989 O 104 (322)

3. If the alignment is correct, check if the detector touches the patient support. This can be
performed
a. by checking the Scan speed in Measurements in the Service tool. If the scan speed
diagram shows unexpected peaks, the detector might touch the patient support.
b. or by removing the side covers of the C-arm. A visual check can performed
verifying that there is free space between the detector and patient support.
If no problems are found performing the above described actions, contact product support. See
section 20.3 for more information regarding failed calibrations.
11.3.6 Skew calibration

This calibration should only be run upon direct instructions from product
Notice
support!
Skew calibration measures and compensates for the deflection of the detector as an effect of
gravity.
Procedure
1. Click on Skew calibration in the Service Tool, under the Service tab.
2. Rotate the C-arm to -90 degrees. Place the Geometry and image field phantom on the
patient support. Compress gently, press Compression Done and hold down the exposure
button.
3. A progress bar is shown and the current step is indicated.
Contact product support if the calibration fails,
11.3.7 AEC calibration

An AEC calibration compensates exposure for shut down channels and detector elements, as well
as fluctuations in X-ray output. The AEC calibration then generates exposure tables based on data
from the current Flatfield calibration. It is a part of Full calibration, but may be done separately in
this way.
Procedure
1. Click AEC calibration in the Service Tool, under the Service tab.
AEC calibration is a part of Full Calibration that is performed on regular basis. However if an
AEC calibration would fail, probable explanations might be that the X-ray tube is new and has to
be burned in by performing a number of exposures before output is ok. A second explanation
might be that the X-ray tube is old and need to be replaced.
1007989 O 105 (322)

11.3.8 Compression paddles

This calibration measures and compensates for the deflection of the compression paddles as they
are compressed, so that the compression height can be correctly determined.
Procedure
1. Click Compression paddles in the Service Tool, under the Service tab.
2. All configured compression paddles are shown to the upper left. The text (calibrated) is
added after the names of the paddles that are already calibrated. See Figure 80.
3. Mark the compression paddle you want to calibrate.
4. Place the compression height calibration phantom on the patient support.
5. Enter the True height of the phantom.
6. Compress to a certain force between 50 and 200 N. Click Measure. The measured values
are displayed in the plot.
7. Compress to a different force between 50 N and 200 N. Click Measure. Repeat this until
there are at least five points in the plot.
8. Click Accept. The text (calibrated) is added after the name of the compression paddle.
9. Mark another compression paddle to calibrate or close the window.
Only calibrated compression paddles are possible to choose via the

Notice
application run on the Acquisition Workstation.
It is also possible to test a calibrated compression paddle, by checking the Test box. Then the
height should equal the real height of the object, regardless of the compression force. A calibrated
compression paddle can be rejected (i.e. marked as not calibrated) by pressing Reject.
Outgoing control
After the compression paddles have been calibrated:
Compress all the way to the patient support. Check that the display shows 0 mm to 2 mm
and no compression force.
1. Check if the compression force measurement is correct.
2. The calibration might fail if the values are too spread. Repeat the procedure until it is
successful.
See section 20.3 for more information regarding handling failed calibrations.
1007989 O 106 (322)

11.4 Measurements
Under the Service tab, various measurements can be performed by clicking Measurements.
Figure 69 How to choose measurements in the Service Tool.
11.4.1 Ripple test

The ripple of the X-ray source can be measured by clicking X-ray ripple.
Click Perform exposure, press Yes, Compression done and expose. (Press No to load data from a
file previously saved in this tool). The measured level of ripple is displayed. See example in
Figure 70 below and Figure 71.
Figure 70 The measured level of ripple.
1007989 O 107 (322)

The peaks in the middle part of Figure 70 show the measured frequencies in the X-ray output
variation. The dominating peaks should be the anode rotation frequency around 130-180 Hz (and
multiples). Within this interval the position of the peak can change depending on the temperature
of the tube, being at higher frequency when cold and lower when hot. Since the ripple peak
reflects the anode speed it will also be at higher frequency if the time between Compression Done
and Exposure button pressed, is longer. Peaks in 50/60 Hz (and multiples) might be caused by
electrical disturbances in the system.
It is also possible to view the ripple from the latest exposure by clicking Get latest exp. In this
case, for a normal scan with varying trig times, no frequency plot will be shown.
If the RMS/mean value is above 1.5% it could indicate that the ripple is too high, and visual study
of images should be performed.
Figure 71 Ripple artefact. The image is zoomed.
1007989 O 108 (322)

11.4.2 Heel profile

It is possible to view the
Heel profile by clicking
Heel profile and Perform
exposure.
11.4.3 Trig time

The trig times of the
last scan can be shown
by clicking Trig time.
See example to the
right.
Figure 72 Trig time of the last scan.
1007989 O 109 (322)

11.4.4 Scan speed

When clicking Scan speed the user can choose one of two alternatives:
1. View the scan speed of the last scan.
2. Perform a new scan where the scan speed and scan geometry can be set. The result is
displayed as in Figure 73 below. The acceptable levels are shown next to the measured
values.
Figure 73 Example of scan speed test.
11.4.5 Information from the IPB

Information from the IPB, such as DU
temperature, is displayed by clicking IPB
Info. See example in Figure 74.
If both or any of the parameters

gbe_rx_error_cnt and gbe_resend_cnt are
not 0, it indicates some kind of
communication error between the AW-
computer and IPB. These errors can be
sporadic.
Figure 74 Information from the IPB
11.4.6 Exposure statistics

Exposure statistics is displayed by
clicking Exp statistics. See example
in Figure 75.
Reset tube statistics will reset the
counter for number of exposures and
tube mAs (dislayed with unit kAs) for
the X-ray tube. This should be done
after a replacement of the X-ray tube.
When the tube counter has been reset,
the system configuration dialog (see
11.10.4) appears, so that the tube serial
Figure 75 Exposure statistics.
number may be changed.
1007989 O 110 (322)

11.4.7 Motor limits

Information about motor limits is displayed
by clicking Motor limits. See example in
Figure 76.
The window shows the parameters for the
end positions for the five motors.
Figure 76 Motor limits for the five motors.
11.4.8 Burst detector

The burst detector test is displayed by
clicking Burst detector. See example in
Figure 77.
This tool is useful to pinpoint if the detector
is bursting, e.g. resulting in bar code
artefacts.
Figure 77 Burst detector.
Notice This tool should only be run upon direct instructions from product support!
11.4.9 Channel output

The response of detector
channels can be examined by
clicking Channel output.
Click Begin, press
compression done and
expose. Viewing options may
be changed by clicking
Options.
Figure 78 Channel output.
1007989 O 111 (322)

11.4.10 Alignment viewer

By clicking Alignment viewer, it is possible to view files from a previous collimator alignment.
The workflow is identical to the one described in 11.3.2, but instead of exposing, files can be
opened by clicking Open file.
11.5 Field limiter scan

The field limiter position may be checked by clicking Field limiter scan under the Service tab (see
10.6)
11.6 Reboot CCS

By clicking Reboot CCS under the Service tab, the CCS is rebooted. Clicking Reboot CCS will not
create a new CCS log-file, which is the case when the CCS is restarted in the Services window.
Figure 79 How to reboot the CCS.
11.7Enable / disable compression paddles

It is possible to enable or disable a calibrated compression paddle in the service tool. That means
that the settings of a calibrated paddle can be saved but the paddle can be hidden for the user of
the mammography application. The compression paddle does not need to be calibrated again when
it is enabled.
1007989 O 112 (322)

Figure 80 Enable / disable compression paddles.
11.8 The channel mask

The channel mask defines what parts of the detector that should be masked. As previously stated,
it often gives interesting clues to why certain problems appear. The channel mask is accessed from
the service tool, under the tab Normal Channel Mask Viewer. Working channels are shown in
black, masked parts are shown in red and gaps between sensors can be seen with background
colour.
It is possible to make a backup file of the CCS Mask, by pressing Backup CCS Mask to File, see
Figure 81 below. The file (ChannelMask.Array2D) can for example be used when reporting
errors to support. Choose Load From File in order to open and view a saved mask.
Figure 81 Channel mask example. Masked areas are shown in red.
It is not only possible to see which parts that have been masked, but also when the masking took
place, e.g. during which calibration step. This information is found in the top left corner under the
displayed bits panel. Below follow a brief explanation of the different parts:
CM Part Description
Elec ASICs which are electronically turned off in the CCS configuration.
Asic Channels masked during ASIC calibration.
Alignment Channels masked during collimator alignment.
Geometry Sensors masked during geometry calibration.
Flatfield Masking by the Full calibration. Deviating channels are masked.
Check These are channels that passed the Full calibration but found to be deviating
during Quick calibration. This mask is reset during full calibration.
Manual Channels manually masked in the Raw data viewer.
Flatfield These are channels that have been disabled in recent Full calibrations.
history
Check history These are channels that have been disabled in recent Quick calibrations.
1007989 O 113 (322)

CM Part Description
High bits At present not in use.
(unknown)
1007989 O 114 (322)

11.9 AEC Status

The AEC Status window (Figure 82) provides detailed information on the performance of the
Auto exposure control, based on measurements of tube output and detector efficiency made during
Full calibration or AEC calibration. Much of the information is used for in-depth analysis of
performance related to image quality and dose, which is not in the scope of this manual. Only
relevant parts are covered here.
In the upper left corner, the exposure setting can be chosen for display:
Normal is the default setting, used for all exposures except for Spot compression.
NormalSpot is used for Spot compression with normal image size.
SmallSpot is used for Spot compression with reduced image size.
The measurements table is an extension of the X-ray tube status in the Tools menu in the AWS
application. The ESAK value corresponds to the current tube output.
Figure 82 The AEC Status dialog.
1007989 O 115 (322)

11.9.1 History view

The History and ESAK History views in the AEC Status dialog show trends in the performance of
the detector and X-ray tube, which can be useful when investigating long-term stability issues.
History
Channel rate history shows the detected
rate of X-ray photons over time,
measured over all functioning channels in
the detector. The curves gradually
decrease over time due to loss of
efficiency in the X-ray tube, and increase
abruptly when the X-ray tube is replaced.
Channel yield history shows the fraction
of functioning channels in the detector
over time. Large variations in this curve
may be caused by detector instabilities.
Figure 83 History view in the AEC Status dialog.
ESAK History
ESAK conversion history shows the
ESAK conversion factor which is used to
translate detected photon rate into dose
rate. This value is usually constant over
time, but may be affected by software
updates in conjunction with changes to
reference methods for dose measurement.
ESAK per mAs history shows the tube
output over time. The last point
corresponds with the ESAK value in the
measurements table. To measure relative
changes in tube output, the Channel rate
history graph is more appropriate, as it is
not affected by changes to the ESAK
conversion factor. Figure 84 ESAK History view in the AEC Status dialog.
1007989 O 116 (322)

11.10 Settings
11.10.1 Dose configuration
The dose configuration can be changed by clicking Dose configuration under the Service tab in
the Service Tool. Two dose configurations (C100, and C120) can be found via the drop down
menu, see Figure 85 below.
Figure 85 Changing dose configuration in the Service Tool.

The system will automatically perform an AEC calibration after the dose configuration has been
changed.
The dose configuration may only be changed after consultation with the
Notice
product management!
11.10.2 Bad pixel map

The bad pixel map shows the number of pixels with no
channels contributing to the image.
The calibrations will not allow any bad pixels so the
value will always be zero.
The image is generated by detector readouts without
X-ray. If the system has local configuration which
would allow bad pixels the dead areas would be
painted red in the image.
Figure 86 Bad pixel map.
1007989 O 117 (322)

11.10.3 Compression
There are two compression modes: Default and
Phantom. Default mode is for normal use, while
Phantom mode is for compression of phantoms in
the AWS. In the Service Tool, Phantom mode is
used everywhere except for this dialog, where the
currently selected mode is used.
For each compression mode, the high and low
speeds, the first stop and the keep compression
speed may be adjusted. The high speed is the
speed without compression and the low speed is
with compression. The keep compression speed is
Figure 87 Settings for compression.
used in Keep compression mode. The upper limit for the
keep compression speed is 25 mm/s.
If changing speeds for Phantom mode, verify that the mechanical emergency stop will not be
triggered when compressing against a stiff object.
The first stop may be set which is the compression force when the paddle stops. The compression
pedal must be pressed again for higher pressure.
It is also possible to select force unit for the display at the stand to deca Newton (daN) or pounds
(lbs).
Press Test settings to test the settings.
Press Test keep compression speed to test the speed

used in Keep compression mode.
Press Store in order to store the settings permanently.
11.10.4 System configuration

Serial numbers for the detector, X-ray tube and HVG can be entered by clicking System
configuration. A warning will appear if the form of the serial number deviates from convention. If
the tube serial number is changed, the user will be asked if the tube exposure counters should be
reset. Answering yes will reset the tube exposure counters.
Figure 88 System configuration
1007989 O 118 (322)

11.10.5 Anode brake settings

The anode brake settings may be changed by clicking Anode brake settings under the Service tab.
The settings only affect exposures made from the AW appliaction. Check the box to brake the
anode after every exposure. Uncheck the box to allow the anode to rotate during the whole
examination- With this setting the anode brakes when the examination is completed or approved,
or when the hang time limit is reached.
Figure 89 Anode brake settings
1007989 O 119 (322)

11.11 Data acquisition

11.11.1 Data acquisition with and without X-ray
Figure 90 Data acquisition with and without X-ray.
It is possible to acquire image data in three ways with the Service Tool. Still without X-ray, Still
with X-ray, and Scan with X-ray. See Figure 91.
Still without X-ray

Still without X-ray performs
acquisition without involving the SCS.
The user can specify number of
readouts and the duration of each
readout. When the box Use test data is
checked, the detector delivers well
defined values instead of noise.
Figure 91 Still without X-ray
Scan with X-ray and Still with X-ray
Scan with X-ray and Still with X-ray perform
acquisition with and without scan motion
respectively. The user can specify voltage and
current, either a calibrated set (recommended) or
freely. The default number of trigs corresponds to a
standard image acquisition, but a lower value may
be used for a shorter scan motion. Time per trig
(microseconds) or exposure (mAs) can be specified
within the valid range shown to the right. The total
exposure time in seconds is shown below.
After pressing Start Scan, a dialog appears showing Figure 92 Scan with X-ray.
how to proceed.
When data has been acquired, the image is shown in the Image Viewer.
1007989 O 120 (322)

11.11.2 Image viewer

The Image viewer is automatically started after data acquisition according to 11.11.1, but can also
be started directly by clicking Image Viewer.
Figure 93 Screen shot from Image Viewer.

Build and get Opens data from single lines or a built image. See Figure 94
Load from Raw Data Opens an image from Raw data.
Load From File Load Array2D file.
Save to File Saves the current file.
Clear Close the current image.
L & W Window level and width (Brightness and contrast)
Apply L/W Applies the values in L and W on the current image.
Save Coord/Point History Save file with coordinates of points from Display Pos/Value.
Left button The drop down menu decides the function of the left mouse button
- Window WL from min/max in region
- Display Pos/Value
- Calculate CNR
- To Raw Data Viewer from point
In the Image viewer it is possible to select how to view the data and thereby rebuild the image.
When choosing Build and Get (in the Image Viewer) the dialog in Figure 94 appears.
Figure 94 Settings when building an image.
Either raw data from single lines can be fetched, or a built image. It is possible to select which bits
in the channel mask that will affect the retrieved data. (To affect an image the bits should be
changed before building the image.)
1007989 O 121 (322)

The data can be retrieved as time normalized, flat fielded or ripple cancelled. When getting an
image the user can select to retrieve e.g. the image, image with median filter (as in AWS but
without IPK filtering), image overlap count. The data will be shown in the image viewer, and
more data can easily be retrieved by using the Build and Get button in the image viewer.
Note: When scanning with X-ray an image is automatically built and shown (ripple cancelled
image without median filter).
Selecting To Raw Data Viewer from point in the Left button drop list allows for clicking in the
image to view data from individual lines of the detector that contributes to this region of the
image.
11.11.3 View latest image

View latest image is a quick way to view the most recent exposure. This is useful for viewing
exposures, made with the AWS, in the Service Tool.
1007989 O 122 (322)

12. Quality control

All quality control procedures are described in full in the document Quality control procedures
[1].
The system on which these quality procedures are performed should be fully calibrated.
Additionally, it is recommended that the procedures are performed at the end of a week, so that
sufficient data is gathered in the system.
1007989 O 123 (322)

Service and troubleshooting

Replacement of parts
Test after maintenance or service
Backup procedures
Installing firmware
Image artefacts
Trouble shooting
1007989 O 125 (322)

13. Replacement of parts

The instructions in the Service Manual must be followed during service and no other spare
parts than approved by Philips may be used. If this is not fulfilled Philips cannot guarantee
function and safety of the equipment and the warranty does not apply.
Some spare parts are supposed to be returned to Philips in a special packing for analysis
and/or repair. It is important that the instructions delivered with the spare part are followed,
e.g. to write a short report or fill in a form. See also section 1.7.
Notice After any service, perform tests according to section 13.41.
13.1 Protective earth points and ESD-protection

When performing service it is important to use proper ESD-protection equipment such as
ESD-bracelet or ESD-mat. Connect the ESD-protection equipment to any of the points
marked with PE-symbol or anywhere where green/yellow-protective earth cables are
connected.
Examples of protective earth points on the main cabinet;

On the X-ray tube (2 points)
On the back side of the C-arm
On the upper edge of the back plate
Inside left and right side doors
Examples of protective earth points on the side cabinet;

Inside the front and rear doors
Incoming protective earth (X1)
Examples of protective earth points on the AW-computer;

AW-computer chassis
1007989 O 126 (322)

13.2 Collimator Curtain (1010575)

Preparation
Detach the X-ray prevent cover from the collimator base mount and then remove the
collimator as described in section 8.1.
Remove the face protection shield, the C-arm front cover and the two C-arm side
covers as described in Sections 8.5 and 0.
Power down the system or put it in Emergency stop condition by pushing one of the
emergency stop buttons.
13.2.1 Disassemble old collimator curtain from C-arm

Procedure
1. Un-hook the wire clip on the back of the collimator curtain cassette (on the horizontal
curtain). See (A) in Figure 95.
2. Loosen the four small nuts and remove the two support pins on the back of the
collimator curtain cassette. See (B) and (C) respectively in Figure 95.
Figure 95 Disassembling of the Collimator Curtain.
1007989 O 127 (322)

3. Remove the four Allen screws on the upper right and left side of the collimator
curtain, i.e. two on each side. See Figure 96 a).
4. Remove the Allen screw securing the interface. See Figure 96 b).
5. Remove the interface together with the pre-collimator. See Figure 96 c).
Figure 96 a) Removing upper right Allen screws for the collimator curtain.
b) Allen screw securing the interface.
c) Removing Allen screw and interface.
6. Remove the two Allen screws securing the lower bracket for the X-ray prevent cover,
see Figure 97 a.
7. Lift up the interface pin in order to facilitate the removal of the collimator curtain, see
Figure 97 b.
8. Carefully remove the collimator curtain, see Figure 97 c.
Figure 97 a) Removing the lower bracket of the X-ray prevent cover.

b) Lifting the collimator mechanism with the interface pin.
c) Removing the collimator curtain
1007989 O 128 (322)

9. Remove the collimator curtain bracket (A), mounted on the C-arm, by loosen the two
Allen screws (B). See Figure 98.
Figure 98 Mounting/removing the upper collimator bracket, A, by tighten/loosen the two Allen
screws B.
Notice Do not re-use the old collimator curtain bracket on the new collimator
curtain.
1007989 O 129 (322)

13.2.2 Prepare the new collimator curtain for mounting

Procedure
1. Remove the collimator curtain bracket from the new collimator curtain by removing
the four Allen screws. See (A) and (B) respectively in Figure 99
Do not re-use the old collimator curtain bracket on the new collimator
Notice
curtain.
2. Un-hook the wire clip on the back of the collimator curtain cassette (on the horizontal curtain).
See part (C) in Figure 99.
3. Loosen the four small nuts and remove the two support pins on the back of the collimator
curtain cassette. See part (D) and (E) respectively in Figure 99.
Figure 99 Assembling of the Collimator Curtain.
1007989 O 130 (322)

13.2.3 Mount new collimator curtain on C-arm

Procedure
1. Mount the new upper collimator curtain bracket on the C-arm. See Figure 100.
Figure 100 Mounting/removing the upper collimator curtain bracket, (A), by tighten/loosen
the two Allen screws (B).
2. Use a 2.5 mm Allen key (A) or a thickness gauge to verify a 2.5 mm distance between
the scan beam (B) and the upper collimator curtain bracket (C). See Figure 101.
Figure 101 Using a 2.5 mm Allen key (A) for adjusting the 2.5 mm distance between scan
beam (B) and upper collimator curtain bracket (C).
1007989 O 131 (322)

3. Attach collimator curtain assembly on the interface pin. See Figure 102 a.
Figure 102 a) Attaching the collimator curtain assembly to the interface pin.
b) Securing the collimator curtain to the upper collimator curtain bracket.
4. Hook on the lower part of the collimator curtain to the C-arm, see Figure 103.
Figure 103 Attaching the lower part of the collimator curtain to the C-arm.
5. Attach the collimator curtain to the upper collimator curtain bracket using four Allen
screws (two on each side). See Figure 102 b.
6. Re-mount the support pins using four small nuts according to (D) and (E) in Figure
99.
1007989 O 132 (322)

7. Re-mount the wire-clip. The wire-clip must be pushed down as much as possible in
the curtain and behind the lower support pin, as shown in Figure 104.
Figure 104 Correct mounting of wire-clip. Pushed down as much as possible in the curtain
and behind the horizontal pin.
8. Check that there is approximately 1 mm play between collimator curtain and
collimator motor (bracket). See Figure 105 a.
Figure 105 Verify sufficient play between collimator curtain and

a) collimator motor bracket. Approximately 1 mm.
b) compression wagon.
1007989 O 133 (322)

9. Remove the compression paddle and lower the collimator to its lowest position.
Move the compression wagon up and down and verify that there is a play between the
collimator curtain and the scan beam. See Figure 105 b.
10. Re-mount the lower bracket of the X-ray prevent cover. See Figure 97 a.
11. Re-mount the interface. See Figure 96 c and b respectively.The Allen screw for the
interface should be secured with 9.7 Nm.
13.2.4 Finalizing of Collimator curtain mounting

Procedure
1. Check that the DC-cable does not rub against the Collimator curtain when moving the
collimator mechanics up and down. (It might be necessary to cut the strap securing
the DC-cable to the motor housing, carefully reroute the cable and attach a new cable
strap.)
2. Calibrate the "Collimator Height" and "Collimator Collision" in SCS Calibration Tool
according to chapter 10.
3. Verify the collimator alignment in the ACA software according to chapter 10.1.
4. Perform motor current measurements for the collimator and scan motor according to
the tests in chapter 15.4.1 (both continuous and static).
13.3 X-ray prevent cover (1010576)

13.3.1 Remove old X-ray prevent cover
See section 8.1 for instructions.
13.3.2 Mount new X-ray prevent cover

See section 8.1 for instructions.
13.3.3 Finalization of replacement of X-ray prevent cover

Procedure
1. Test of collimator motor currents according to section 15.4.1.
2. Perform Tests after maintenance or service (chapter 14).
1007989 O 134 (322)

13.4 X-ray tube unit (1012515)

Alternations done to the X-ray tube and its alignment may affect the image
Notice quality. All such alternations must therefore be followed by calibration of
the system.
Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007140 in the service binder.
Preparations
Remove the C-arm front cover and the left and right C-arm side covers, as described in
sections 8.4 and 8.6.
Perform air purge and oil level adjustment of the X-ray system according to section
9.2.23. Leave the purge kit hooked onto the stand and the covers removed.
Move the C-arm to a vertical position (0 angle) and lower the C-arm. This to make it
easier to reach and change the X-ray tube, which is very heavy.
Power down the system and shut off the fixed main switch according to sections 6.1
and 6.2. This enables manual movement of the collimator wagon and makes it possible
to disconnect cables without risk of harm to the system or personnel.
13.4.1 Remove X-ray tube unit

Procedure
1. Remove the two cover brackets by removing the four Allen-screws, two on each side.
See E in Figure 108.
2. If the bracket covering the cables of the X-ray tube is mounted, removed the bracket.
See (G) in Figure 109.
The cooling hoses of the X-ray tube can easily slip into the scan arm when
Note disconnected from the X-ray tube. Secure the hoses using e.g. cable straps
before disconnecting the hoses.
3. Note how the two cooling hoses of the X-ray tube unit are placed in order to place the
hoses of the new unit the same way. See Figure 108 and Figure 109. Disconnect the
hoses.
When disconnecting the X-ray tube high voltage cable always connect
Caution! the cable contact pins to the stands chassis ground. This to prevent
electrical discharges.
4. Disconnect the filament cable and the high voltage cable.

5. Remove the three protective earth cables connected to the X-ray tubes protective
ground. See Figure 108. Use a 7/64 Allen key. (The screw is a UNC6S 6-32x9.5
A2.)
6. Remove the Allen-screws, see (A) in Figure 106, attached to the X-ray tube unit using
a T-shaped Allen key of size 5 mm. (See section 13.4.5 on how to move the scan arm
to its end positions in order to reach the screws.)
1007989 O 135 (322)

The X-ray tube unit is very heavy. Use a stable chair or a ladder with
Note
suitable height to access the X-ray tube unit.
7. Wrap a broad band around the X-ray tube unit in order to get a firm grip.
8. Remove the X-ray tube unit by carefully lifting it upwards.
Figure 106 Remove and mount X-ray tube unit.
13.4.2 Mount X-ray tube unit

Procedure
1. Make sure the X-ray tube fits the two guides, labelled B in Figure 106.
2. Fasten the four Allen screws (A).
3. Connect the two cooling hoses from
the C-arm, to the short hoses
attached to the X-ray tube unit.
4. Connect the filament cable from the
C-arm to the back of the X-ray tube.
5. Carefully clean the contact on the
high voltage cable.
6. Put a thin layer of grease on the
receptacles body, a thin layer on
receptacles tip and a larger amount
on the receptacles 45 degrees edge. Figure 107 Applying grease on the high voltage
See (C) and (D) in Figure 107. The contacts.
grease must be Varian medical
systems vapour-proofing compound or Wacker Silicon paste P4. Make sure there
are no air bubbles in the applied grease.
1007989 O 136 (322)

7. Connect the high voltage cable to the back of the X-ray tube. See Figure 108. Be sure
to give excessive grease time to flow out from the contact under pressure before you
turn the contact.
8. Connect the three protective ground cables to the protective ground screw, see (F) in
Figure 108. I.e. two ground cables of the filament cable (black and green, yellow
respectively) and the uncoated ground cable of the high voltage cable.
9. Reattach the two cover brackets by tighten the four Allen screws. See (E) in Figure
108.
Figure 108 Left: Location of screws, (E), for cover brackets.

Right: X-ray tube unit with cables, and hoses seen from back. Location of PE-screw (F).
Figure 109 C-arm seen from back. Cable bracket (G) and routing of cables and hoses.
Location of PE-screw (F).
1007989 O 137 (322)

13.4.3 Breaking-in and testing the new X-ray tube unit

When the X-ray tube unit has been replaced successfully, the following actions must be done:
1. Check Section 17.5.4 if the HVG settings must be adjusted depending on the item
number of the X-ray tube.
2. Power up the system by turning on the fixed main switch and pressing the ON button.
3. Perform air purge and oil level adjustment of the X-ray system according to section
9.2.23. Leave the covers removed.
4. Start the Service Tool. Under the Service tab, choose Measurements: Exp. Statistics.
Write down the number of exposures and the tube mAs for the old tube. This
information shall be reported in protocol and on spare part return form.
5. Reset the tube exposure counter.
It is important that the tube exposure statistics are reported correctly, and
Notice that the tube exposure counter is reset for the new tube, according to the
procedure above.
6. In the System configuration dialog, enter the serial number of the new X-ray tube.
7. Make sure that filament 0 is selected by looking in C:\Program
Files\Sectra\CCS\local_config for a file with the contents:
HVG {
# Filament selection (0 or 1).
filament = 1
}
Remove the file, the system is by default set for filament=0.

8. Restart the CCS service by opening the Service Tool and choosing Reboot CCS,
9. Open the file actual_config.log in the CCS log directory and verify that filament 0 is
selected in the HVG section.
10. Uncheck the Brake anode setting in the Tools menu on the AW to limit the strain on
the high speed starter and anode assembly. Perform three exposures on minimum
mAs at each available kV (i.e. totally 3x5=15 exposures). Change the Brake anode
setting back to normal.
If Brake anode is checked, i.e. the anode is braked after each exposure,
Notice wait at least 30 seconds after completed exposure before pressing
Compression Done.
11. Verify the collimator alignment (section 11.3.4). Align the collimator if needed,
(section 11.3.2) and perform a Geometry calibration (section 11.3.5).
Tip: If you need to align the collimator, try to make the alignment work for both
filaments and you can save time on the service visit when you change filaments. See
1007989 O 138 (322)

instruction in 11.3.3. Remember to change back to filament = 0 when you are finished
and verify that it is ok.
12. Verify the position of the field limiter (section 10.7.1). Align the field limiter if
needed.
Tip: If you need to adjust the field limiter, try to make the adjustment work for both
filaments and you can save time on the service visit when you change filaments. See
instruction in section 11.3.3. Remember to change back to 0 when you are finished
and verify that it is ok.
13. If collimator alignment and geometry calibration have been done, check the Image
Field and missed tissue by the chest wall, see Quality control procedures [1].
14. Perform a ripple test (see section 11.4.1).
15. Verify that there is no radiation leakage (see section 15.6).
16. Perform a Full calibration, see Quality control procedures [1].
17. According to Quality control procedures [1], check:
Tube output
HVL
Tube Voltage
Air Kerma reproducibility
13.4.4 Finalizing the X-ray tube exchange

1. Reattach the C-arm front cover and the left and right C-arm side covers, as described
in sections 8.4 and 8.6.
2. Run Daily quality control (using phantom and channel mask).
3. Perform the parts of Tests after maintenance or service according to chapter 14 that
has not already been done.
The tube output will decrease in the beginning, depending on how much
Notice
the Modality is used.
1007989 O 139 (322)

13.4.5 Moving the scan arm to its end positions

This section describes how to use the SCS Calibration Tool in order to move the scan arm to
its end positions when exchanging the X-ray tube. (Rotating the scan axis manually is very
time consuming.)
Procedure
1. Start the SCS Calibration tool.
2. Choose Reset SCS Calibration Mode (under the menu Settings).
3. Choose Advanced Mode (under the menu Settings).
4. Choose the tab Servo. See Figure 110 below.
5. Choose motor: Scan.
6. Press Goto Position One (left) or Goto Position Two (right) depending on desired
direction.
7. The stand must be in Emergency Stop mode when changing the X-ray tube.
Figure 110 Using the SCS Calibration tool for moving the scan arm during X-ray tube
exchange.
1007989 O 140 (322)

13.5 X-ray tube filament change

The X-ray tube filament change should be done after the first filament has done
approximately the recommended number of exposures. Filament change should not be done if
the first filament has failed.
1. Change the filament setting in CCS local configuration by creating the file
filament.def under C:\Program Files\Sectra\CCS\
local_config, with the following contents:
HVG {
# Filament selection (0 or 1).
filament = 1
}
To change back to filament 0, remove the file filament.def.

2. Restart the CCS service by opening the Service Tool and choosing Reboot CCS,
3. Open the file actual_config.log in the CCS log directory and verify that correct
filament is selected in the HVG section.
The exposure counter will automatically switch to counting exposures for

Notice
Filament 2, see section 11.4.6.
4. In the Tools menu on the AW, uncheck the Brake anode-setting in to limit the strain
on the high speed starter and anode assembly. Perform three exposures on minimum
mAs, at each available kV, i.e. totally 3x5 = 15 exposures. Change the Brake anode
Compression Done.
5. Verify the collimator alignment (section 11.3.4), align the collimator if needed
(section 11.3.2) and perform a geometry calibration (section 11.3.5).
6. Verify the position of the field limiter (section 10.7.1), adjust the field limiter if
needed (section 10.7.2).
7. If collimator alignment and geometry calibration have been done, check Image Field
and missed tissue by the chest wall according to Quality control procedures [1].
8. Perform a ripple test (section 20.1).
9. Verify that there is no radiation leakage (section 15.6).
10. Perform a Full calibration, see Quality control procedures [1].
11. According to Quality control procedures [1] check:
Tube output and Air Kerma reproducibility
HVL
1007989 O 141 (322)

13.6 High voltage generator (1004005)

Related drawings
See electrical drawings 1007140 and 1007161 in the service binder.
Preparation
Raise the C-arm to highest possible position (in order to access HVG easier).
Take a close look at the markings of the cables and note how the cables are
Notice routed, for easy reattachment.
Be careful not to drop any screws into the generator unit.
13.6.1 Remove High voltage generator

Procedure
1. Open left side door on the stand.
2. Power down the system by pressing the OFF button, wait until the computer shuts
down and shut off the fixed main switch (see chapter 6.1 and 6.2). Check that the
generator diodes not are lit and wait until the orange light on top of the HVG has gone
out (see section 20.9.3). This makes it possible to disconnect cables without risk of
harm to the system or you.
3. Disconnect the high voltage cable (J1), filament cable, (J2), flow control cable (TB3)
and the earth cables. See Figure 111. To be able to disconnect the high voltage
contact it can be necessary to slide the cable a bit upwards, if the cable bracket is
holding the cable too tight it can be slightly loosened or removed.
When disconnecting the high voltage cable, always connect the cable
contact pins to the stands chassis ground. This to prevent electrical
discharges.
Caution! The high voltage cable and filament cable are very fragile. Be careful
when handling.
When disconnecting TB3, be careful when pressing the screw driver into
the connection terminal, to avoid any damage.
4. Loosen upper screw and the two lower screws. See Figure 111.
5. Carefully rotate the HVG clockwise (while sliding it along the back beam) until it is
outside the main cabinet.
6. Lift HVG carefully and lay it down.
7. Carefully loosen cables attached to the bottom side.
8. Remove upper and lower plate to be re-used on new HVG. See Figure 112.
1007989 O 142 (322)

Figure 111 High voltage cable (J1), filament cable, (J2), flow control cable (TB3) and the earth
cables.
Figure 112 Attaching chassis mounting plates to the HVG and cable connections on the bottom side
of the HVG. HV Generator Signal Cable (JB1), HVG three phase power cable (TB1),
single phase mains power cable (TB2) and protective earth (PE).
13.6.2 Mount High voltage generator

Procedure
1. Attach upper and lower plate on the new high voltage generator. See Figure 112.
2. Connect the cables on the bottom side of the generator. See Figure 112.
3. Raise the generator and fit it back into position. Be careful not to squeeze any of the
cables.
4. Fasten the three screws that hold the generator to the chassis. See Figure 111.
1007989 O 143 (322)

5. Connect the filament cable and the flow control cable on top of the generator.
6. Carefully clean the contact of the high voltage cable. Put a thin layer of grease on the
receptacles body, a thin layer on receptacles tip and a large amount on the receptacles
45 degrees edge. See Figure 107. The grease must be Varian medical systems
vapour-proofing compound or Wacker Silicon paste P4. Connect the high voltage
cable to the high voltage generator.
7. Check that no cables are squeezed or strained. If the cable bracket was loosened,
remember to tighten it again.
8. Secure the cables with tie wraps.
9. Close left door on the stand.
13.6.3 Running-in and testing the new High voltage generator

When the HVG has been replaced successfully, the following actions must be done:
1. Check section 17.5.4 if the HVG settings must be adjusted depending on the item
number of the X-ray tube.
2. Power up the system by turning on the fixed main switch and pressing the ON button.
3. Under the Service tab, choose System configuration. Enter the serial number of the
new HVG.
4. Uncheck the Brake anode setting in the Tools menu on the AW to limit the strain on
the high speed starter and anode assembly. Perform three exposures on minimum
mAs at each available kV (i.e. totally 3x5=15 exposures. Change the Brake anode
Compression Done.
5. Perform a ripple test (section 20.1).

6. Perform Full calibration, see Quality control procedures [1].
7. According to Quality control procedures [1], check:
Tube output
Tube Voltage
13.6.4 Finalizing the High voltage generator exchange

1. Put all covers back.
2. Run Daily quality control (using phantom and channel mask). If the image looks OK, the
system is ready to use.
1007989 O 144 (322)

13.7 X-ray Tube cooling unit (1010594)

When planning on removing the tube make sure that it is close to room
temperature. If the tube just has been used hard wait at least 10 minutes
since the last exposure with the heat exchanger running. Just before
Notice
disconnecting the oil hoses, touch the tube housing to check that it is not
hot (it is ok if the tube is slightly warm) and also double check that the heat
exchanger has been turned off.
Preparations
All disconnecting and connecting of oil hoses to the tube should be done with tubes
(and systems) that are close to room temperature. If the tube is used hard just before the
change it should be left at least 10 min with the heat exchanger on before disconnecting
the oil hoses.
Shut down the system and turn OFF the fixed mains circuit breaker.
Pull out the detector cooler on the rails. See section 13.30.
13.7.1 Remove X-ray tube cooling unit (liquid cooled)

Procedure
1. In the side cabinet, disconnect the power cable from the cooling unit.
If there is not enough space to fully open the side or back door it might be
necessary to remove the roof of the side cabinet in order to replace the
Notice
cooling unit. On that occasion the cable to the electric fan located under
the roof must be disconnected.
2. Disconnect the two self-shutting couplings mounted on the two oil hoses leading from
the cooling unit. Note how the hoses are placed in the cabinet.
3. Remove the self-locking nylon cable tie around the expansion vessel.
4. Reach underneath the cooling unit and unscrew the four Allen screws that hold the
unit into place.
5. Lift out the cooling unit from the side cabinet.
13.7.2 Mount X-ray tube cooling unit (liquid cooled)

Procedure
Repeat the steps described above (13.7.1) in reversed order.
1007989 O 145 (322)

13.8 SCS board and box (1010551)

Use proper ESD-protection equipment when performing these tasks.
Notice
See section 13.1 on page 126 for more information.
Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007058 in the service binder.
Preparation
Note which firmware version is used.
Open left and right side doors.
Remove the Display cover (chapter 8.5).
Procedure - Perform a backup of the SCS

1. Perform the backup procedure of the SCS parameters on the old SCS according to
section 16.3. Note the current firmware version.
Procedure - Removing the SCS board and box:

2. Note how the cables are routed to the
SCS unit for easy reattachment, see
Figure 113.
3. Disconnect the +5V IPB/SCS power
supply connector, and the +24V
IPB/SCS power supply connector
(K13).
4. Disconnect all other connectors (K1-
K18) from the SCS.
5. Loosen the lower screws and remove
the upper screws, see Figure 113.
6. Remove the SCS unit.
Figure 113 Screws securing the SCS board

and box.
Procedure - Mounting the SCS board and box

7. Mount the new SCS unit.
8. Connect the connectors K1-K12 and K14-K18 to the SCS according to markings on
the box, see Figure 113.
9. Connect the 5V from IPB/SCS power supply (2A) to +5V and 24V from IPB/SCS
power supply to +24V (K13).
1007989 O 146 (322)

Procedure Re-install the firmware

10. Install the SCS firmware according to section 17.4.1. i.e. the same as original.
Procedure Restoring the backup of the SCS

11. Perform a restore of the SCS parameters according to section 16.4.
12. Remount the display cover (chapter 8.5), close left and right side doors.
Procedure Calibration
1. Perform all Calibrations except Scan Length, Collimator Height, Compression Height
and Compression Switch, described in chapter 10.1.
2. Perform a Full Calibration according to Quality Control Procedures [1].
Outgoing control Functions controlled by the SCS

1. Compression force (chapter 9.2.1)
2. Compression height (chapter 9.2.2)
3. Movement of the modality (chapter 9.2.4)
4. Buttons and levers (chapter 9.2.5)
5. Emergency stop buttons (chapter 9.2.6)
6. Indicator lamps and lights (chapter 9.2.7)
7. Mechanical compression safety coupling (chapter 9.2.9)
8. Verify function of collision protection
a. Collimator movement (chapter 9.2.11)
b. C-arm height movement (chapter 9.2.12)
c. C-arm rotation movement (chapter 9.2.13)
13.9 Patient support (1010566/1020286)

Procedure
1. See section 8.7 for instructions on how to replace patient support.
2. Verify that the detector does not touch the patient support during scanning.
3. Perform a Compression height limit determination according to section 10.9.
4. Verify Image field as described in Quality control procedures [1].
1007989 O 147 (322)

13.10 IPB unit (1007169)

Use proper ESD-protection equipment when performing these tasks.
Notice
See section 13.1 for more information.
Preparation
Check which firmware that is installed (found in
the About-window in the AWS).
Shut down the system by pressing the OFF-button
on the stand. Wait for the system to shut down.
Open right side door.
Procedure Removing the IPB Unit

1. Disconnect the 5V power cable from the 5V
connector of the IPB.
2. Disconnect remaining cables:
- SCS communications cable from the SCS
connector.
- DU Infiniband cable from the DU connector.
- AW Gigabit Ethernet cable from the AW
connector.
3. Dismount the IPB unit by unscrewing the four
screws see red rings in the image to the right.
Procedure Mounting the IPB Unit

1. Attach the new IPB unit and the cables in reverse
order. Figure 114 Location of screws
securing the IPB unit.
Procedure power up the system
1. Follow the detailed instructions for starting up the system described in chapter 5.1,
5.2 and 5.4 respectively.
Procedure Re-install the firmware

1. Install the IPB firmware according to section 17.2.1.
2. Verify the version number of the installed firmware (found in the About-window in
the AWS).
Procedure Tests
1. Perform Tests after Service and Maintenance (chapter 14).
1007989 O 148 (322)

13.11 Detector Unit (1010572)

Use proper ESD-protection equipment when performing these tasks. See
Notice
section 13.1 on page 126 for more information.
Tools
Screw driver
2.5, 4, 5 mm Allen key
Torque screw driver with 2.5 and 4 mm Allen bits
10 mm fixed key
Big side cutters (cutting pliers)
Hose Clamp pliers
Bucket or bowl (minimum 5 litres)
Pair of scissors
Procedure prepare for detector exchange

1. Remove front and side covers and rotate the C-arm to 180.
2. Remove patient support as described in chapter 8.7.
Notice Never touch the upper part, side panels or the electronics of the detector.
3. Rotate the C-arm to 0 and to a comfortable working height.

4. Place a bucket under the C-arm. The bucket should hold at least 5 litres.
5. Shut down the system by pressing the OFF-button on the mammography stand
(chapter 6.1). Wait until the AW-computer shuts down and then turn off the fixed
main switch (chapter 6.2).
Procedure remove old detector

1. Remove the tube brackets on both sides; see (A) in Figure 116. (If shim washers are
used, note the number of washers on each side. They need to be replaced later.)
2. Cut the two hose clamps (Figure 115) on the detector unit and remove the clamps.
Figure 115 Cut hose clamp on the detector unit.
1007989 O 149 (322)

3. Aerate the cooling hoses connected to the detector. Slightly bend one of the cooling
hoses until air is sucked into the system between the hose and the hose connection of
the detector. When no more air is sucked into the hose do the same procedure on the
other hose connection. There should not be any visible coolant in the bend of the
cooling hoses at the top position of the C-arm.
Make sure that the cooling hoses connected to the detector unit are
Caution!
properly drained. If not almost 5 litres of coolant will be depleted.
Caution! Make sure cooling water is not spilled on the detector.
4. Unplug the hoses with a pulling and slightly rotating movement.

5. Remove the protective cover, i.e. the white plastic lid, on the top of the detector.
6. Remove the copper tape around the detector unit.
7. Unplug the fibre cable from the detector. In order to avoid communication problems
note the positions of the two fibres.
8. Before removing the detector, make sure you have the bucket easy accessible.
Even though the connection hoses are empty there is still coolant inside the
Notice
detector.
9. Loosen the four nuts securing the detector unit. (Tip! Move the scan arm manually in
order to access the nuts more easily.)
10. Pull out the detector half way on the four guides.
11. Remove the power cable from the detector, see (B) in Figure 116.
12. Remove the detector by holding it horizontally until the remaining coolant inside the
detector can be poured into the bucket.
Figure 116 Tube bracket (A) and location of power cable (B).
1007989 O 150 (322)

Procedure mount new detector
To be able to lift the detector out of the box, loosen only the four
Notice
peripheral bolts. The spare part detector may contain coolant.
1. Protect the two screws (A) with electrical tape (B) according to Figure 117. The tape
should be applied next to the metal edge but not on the flat side (C).
Figure 117 Protect two screws (A) with electrical tape (B).
2. Mount the four studs on the new detector unit. Tighten an expended nut on a stud to
be able to use a torque wrench with 10 mm fixed key to tighten the stud with 3 Nm. If
there is no torque wrench available, tighten the studs until they reach the bottom of
the screw holes.
3. Push the detector half way on the four studs through the scan arm.
4. Connect the power cable.
5. Secure the detector with the four nuts (6.1 Nm).
6. Tape the chink between the detector unit and the scan arm using copper tape. Apply
tape on all sides of the detector unit, as shown in Figure 118.
a. Do not apply tape on the plane part of the scan arm shown in (C).
b. Do not cover the screw holes of the tube brackets.
c. Do not apply tape over the serial number.
d. Cut and fold the copper tape behind the connection pipe on each side, as
shown in (A). (Tip! Cut out a U-shaped piece of tape to fit around the
connection pipes.)
e. Fold the copper tape around the edge, as shown in (B).
f. Make sure that there is no visible chink between the detector and scan arm.
1007989 O 151 (322)

Figure 118 Applying copper tape over the joint between detector unit and scan arm. The image shows
the end result (with tube brackets mounted) when the C-arm is in 0.
7. Connect the fibre cable and re-mount the plastic lid. To protect the fibre cable
connection, move the protection plug from the spare part detector to the replaced
detector.
8. Slip on hose clamps on the hoses and connect the hoses to the connection pipes of the
detector. Secure the hose clamps with the squeezed part pointing (135) downwards
using a hose clamp pliers.
9. Mount the tube brackets. One on each side. Use the shim washers.
10. Power up the system (chapter 5.1, 5.2) and check for any leakages.
11. If necessary fill up the detector cooling unit (chapter 5.3).
12. Continue the start-up sequence (chapter 5.4).
13. Rotate the C-arm to 180 and remount the patient support (chapter 8.7).
14. Manually check the end stops for the scan movement (chapter 15.2) and check that
the detector does not touch the patient support from inside. There should be 0.3 1.3
mm of space between the front of the detector and the patient support.
Procedure Tests after detector replacement

1. Restore, from the CD, the attached channel mask (ChannelMask.Array2D) to load the
manual masking for the spare part detector. (Run Service Tool, click on Channel
Mask Viewer, and choose Restore Mask From File to CCS.)
2. Under the Service tab, choose System configuration. Enter the serial number of the
new detector.
3. Run ASIC calibration, see section 11.2.
4. Perform a new Collimator alignment, see section 11.3.2.
5. Run Geometry calibration, see section 11.3.5.
6. Run Full calibration as described in Quality control procedures [1].
7. Perform a Compression height limit determination according to section 10.9.
8. Verify the Spatial resolution according to Quality control procedures [1].
9. Measure the Contrast-to-noise ratio according to Quality control procedures [1].
1007989 O 152 (322)

10. Verify the Image field and X-ray field agreement according to Quality control
procedures [1].
11. Verify missed tissue at chest wall according to Quality control procedures [1].
12. Update the Service & maintenance tab in C&S database with among other the
information from steps 7 to 9, and attach the data files delivered with the spare part
detector. (Tip: Compress the data files to one file.)
1007989 O 153 (322)

13.12 Scan movement motor (1010588)

Preparation
Remove C-arm front cover as described in section 8.4.
Remove C-arm side covers as described in section 8.6.
Procedure remove scan movement motor

1. Disconnect the pre-assembled power cable of the motor.
2. Loosen the two 2.5 mm Allen screws securing the motor axis to the axis coupling, see
A in Figure 119.
3. Remove the six Allen screws securing the motor to the chassis, see B. Use the two
holes, C, in order to reach the two inner Allen screws.
Figure 119 Replacing scan movement motor.

(A) The two Allen screw securing the motor axis to the axis coupling.
(B) The six Allen screws securing the motor to the chassis.
(C) Holes for easy access of the two inner Allen screws (that are not visible in the
illustration).
Procedure mount scan movement motor

1. Slide the new motor into place by simultaneously pushing the axis into the axis
coupling.
2. Secure the motor to the chassis using the six Allen screws, see B.
3. Secure the motor axis to the axis coupling using the two Allen screws, see A.
4. Connect the power cable.
Calibration
When the scan motor is replaced, the following calibrations need to be performed
Calibration of the scan in SCS Calibration Tool
Check scan speed
Full calibration
Outgoing Control
Test motor currents of the scan movement motor according to chapter 15.4.3 and 15.5.2.
1007989 O 154 (322)

13.13 Scan ball-screw and nut (1015560)

This section describes how to replace
the Scan Movement ball screw with nut
for a system that is either upgraded from
S0 to S1 or delivered as a S1.
13.13.1 Remove old scan movement ball screw with nut
Incoming control / action

Put the stand in Emergency Stop mode.
Tools
2 mm and 3 mm Allen keys
Fixed keys 10 mm and 13 mm
Figure 120 Remove scan movement ball screw with nut.
Procedure
1. Loosen the four Allen screws of the axis coupling (A), see Figure 120.
2. Slide the axis coupling as near to the scan motor as possible.
3. Remove the M8 nut (B) using 10 mm and 13 mm fixed keys.
4. Remove the four MC6S M4x12 screws (C).
5. Lift off the old scan movement ball screw with nut.
1007989 O 155 (322)

13.13.2 Mount new scan movement ball screw with nut
Tools
1.5, 2 mm and 3 mm Allen key, Torx T9
Fixed keys 12 mm and 13 mm (and/or spanner)
90 Torque wrench with 3 mm Allen bits
0 Torque wrench (15 Nm)
Torque screw driver with 1.5 mm Allen bits
Protective gloves
Figure 121 Mount scan movement ball screw with nut
Procedure
1. Place the scan movement ball screw (A) with nut (B), see Figure 121.
2. Tighten the M8 nut (C) on the scan movement screw (A) at 15 Nm.
3. Centre the scan coupling (D) so that equal lengths of the motor axis and scan
movement screw are inside the scan coupling.
4. Tighten the four M2 Allen screws. (E) at 0.35 Nm.
5. Mount the four MC6S M4x12 screws (F). Do not tighten the screws yet.
1007989 O 156 (322)

6. Rotate the scan screw (A) by hand until the nut (B) is as close as possibly to the
motor bracket (G).
7. Tighten the four MC6S M4x12 (F) at 2,9 Nm.
8. Lubricate the scan screw with 1015566 Grease KSS MSG No.1 Lithium.
Outgoing control manual checks

1. Verify smooth movement of the scan movement mechanics by moving the mechanics
back and forth by hand.
2. Check scan movement end stops (chapter 15.2).
Outgoing control motor currents and scan speed

1. Test Scan Speed (chapter 15.4).
2. Motor currents
a. Plot scan motor currents (chapter 15.4.3).
b. Check idle motor currents of the scan motor (chapter 15.5.2).
Outgoing control calibrations

1. Perform a Scan Calibration in the SCS Calibration Tool.
2. Perform a Geometry calibration (chapter 11.3.5).
3. Perform a Full Calibration according to the User manual 1007994.
Outgoing control verifications

1. Verify the resolution with a line pair phantom according to Quality control
procedures [1].
2. Perform an Image field and X-ray field agreement test according to the Quality
control procedures [1].
1007989 O 157 (322)

13.14 Scan movement nut holder

13.14.1 For systems upgraded to S1 in field (1015558)
Parts
1015558 Scan movement nut holder.
Tools
1.5 mm and 3 mm Allen keys.
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers
Rotate C-arm to 180
System in emergency stop
Figure 122 Replace scan movement nut holder that has been upgraded in field.
Procedure remove old scan movement nut holder

1. Loosen the two Allen screws (A) securing the motor axis coupling to the scan screw.
See Figure 122.
2. Loosen the nut (B).
3. Remove the three Allen screws (C) securing the spacer (D) to the scan movement nut
holder (E).
4. Remove the scan screw (F) together with the spacer (D) and nut (B).
1007989 O 158 (322)

5. Loosen the two Allen screws (G) securing the readhead (H) and the two cable clips
(I) securing the readhead cable to the scan movement nut holder (E).
Figure 123 Remove scan movement nut holder from linear guide and scan movement base.
6. Remove the eight Allen screws (J) securing the scan movement nut holder (E) to the
linear guide wagons (K).
7. Lift up the scan movement nut holder (E) and the scan movement base (L) in order to
access the screw (M). See Figure 123.
8. Remove the screw (M) securing the scan movement nut holder (E) to the scan
movement base (L).
9. Lift the scan movement nut holder (E) off the scan movement base (L).
Procedure mount new scan movement nut holder

1. Attach the new scan movement nut holder (E) to the scan movement base (L).
2. Secure the screw (M) at 24 Nm.
3. Mount the scan movement nut holder (E) to the linear guide wagons (K).
4. Secure the eight Allen screws (J) at 1.2 Nm.
5. Re-mount the readhead (H), see Figure 122, using the two Allen screws (G). Tighten
the screws only a little bit in order to allow adjustment.
6. Route the readhead cable using the two cable clips (I).
7. Move the scan movement nut holder (E) and scan movement base (L) along the linear
guide to the scan motor bracket.
8. Re-mount the scan screw (F) together with the spacer (D) and nut (B).
9. Secure the three Allen screws (C) securing the spacer (D) to the scan movement nut
holder (E).
10. Secure the nut (B) at 24 Nm.
11. Secure the two Allen screws (A) at 0.35 Nm.
12. Verify the operation of the readhead (H) according to chapter 15.3 and adjust the
position of the readhead according to chapter 20.6.2.
1007989 O 159 (322)


1. Ensure smooth movement of the scan movement mechanics by moving the mechanics
back and forth.
3. Check function of scan movement read head (chapter 15.3).

2. Motor currents
c. Plot scan motor currents (chapter 15.4.3).
d. Check idle motor currents of the scan motor (chapter 15.5).


procedures [1].
13.14.2 For systems delivered as S1 (1015555)
Parts
1015555 Scan movement nut holder.
Tools
1.5 mm and 3 mm Allen keys.
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers
Rotate C-arm to 180.
System in emergency Stop
Procedure
Follow Procedure in 13.14.1.
The only difference is that the spacer (C in Figure 122) is not used on systems delivered as
S1. I.e systems delivered with 1015555.
Outgoing control
Follow Outgoing Control in 13.14.1.
1007989 O 160 (322)

13.15 Scan motor bearing assembly

13.15.1 For systems upgraded to S1 in field (1015559)
Parts
1015559 Scan motor bearing assembly. Field
upgrade.
1010588 Motor Scan Movement
1014247 Grease KSS MSG No.1 Lithium
Tools
1009403 Scan motor fixture.
1.5, 2.5 and 3 mm Allen keys
12 mm fixed key.
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers
Procedure remove old motor bearing assembly (i.e. motor bracket with bearing)
1. Disconnect the DC-cable (A) of the scan motor (white quick coupling).
2. Loosen the two Allen screws (B) securing the motor axis coupling (C) to the scan
screw (I).
3. Loosen the nut (D).
4. Remove the three Allen screws (E) securing the motor bracket to the C-arm.
5. Remove the motor bracket (F) from the C-arm.
1007989 O 161 (322)

Figure 124 Replace scan motor bearing assembly (i.e. motor bracket and bearing) for systems
upgraded to S1 in field.
Procedure mount new motor bearing assembly (i.e. motor bracket with bearing)
1. Remove the motor axis coupling (C) from the old motor.
2. Mount the new motor on the new scan motor bearing assembly (i.e. motor bracket
with bearing) using the six Allen screws (G).
3. Pre-mount the motor axis coupling (C) on the new motor. Do not tighten the two
Allen screws (H).
4. Carefully place the motor bracket on the C-arm and push the scan screw (I) through
the bearing while pre-mounting the nut (D) on the scan screw.
5. Mount the motor bracket to the C-arm using the three Allen screws (E). Fasten, but do
not tighten, the screws.
6. Mount the scan motor fixture (J) on the linear guide and secure the fixture to the
motor bracket using the two Allen screws (K).
7. Tighten the nut (D) at 24 Nm.
8. Secure the four screws (B) and (H) at 0.35 Nm.
9. Adjust the position of the motor bracket (F).
10. Tighten the screw (G) in order to align the motor bracket to the linear guide.
11. Secure the motor bracket to the C-arm using the three Allen screws (D) at 5.7 Nm.
12. Remove the scan motor fixture (I) by loosen (K) and (G).
13. Lubricate the scan screw with 1014247 Grease KSS MSG No.1 Lithium.
14. Connect the DC-cable (A) to the white quick coupling.

back and forth.
1007989 O 162 (322)


2. Motor currents
b. Check idle motor currents of the scan motor (chapter 15.5).


procedures [1].
1007989 O 163 (322)

13.15.2 For systems delivered as S1 (1015556)
Parts
1015556 Scan motor bearing
assembly.
1010588 Motor Scan
Movement
1014247 Grease KSS MSG
No.1 Lithium
Tools
1.5 mm and 3 mm Allen keys
90 Torque wrench with 3 mm
Allen bits
Torque screw driver with
1.5 mm Allen bits
Vernier Calliper Figure 125 Scan motor bearing assembly (1015556).
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers
Procedure
1. In order to re-create the physical position of the end stop after replacing the scan
motor bearing assembly, do the following:
a. Use a pen to mark the position of the scan motor bearing assembly on the C-
arm. See red line (A) in Figure 125. This mark will be used later when mounting
and positioning the spare part on the C-arm.
b. Measure the distance (B) on the existing scan motor bearing assembly.
c. Measure the corresponding distance on the spare part. Make sure that the spare
part has the same measure. Adjust the screw on the spare part if necessary.
2. Follow Procedure in chapter 13.15.1.The only difference for (1015556) is that the
scan motor fixture is not needed. Systems delivered as S1 have namely a longer linear
guide mounted on the C-arm and a corresponding spline (C) in the scan motor bearing
assembly.

back and forth.
1007989 O 164 (322)


2. Motor currents
b. Check idle motor currents of the scan motor (chapter 15.5).


procedures [1].
1007989 O 165 (322)

13.16 Encoder reader head (1010587)

Parts
Part.No Name Qty
1010587 Encoder reader head 1
Tools
1015565 Readhead setting jig 0.8 mm
2.5 mm Allen key
Preparation
Identify if the system is field up-graded from S0 to S1. A field-upgraded system does
not have a spline in the motor bracket. (See images on motor brackets in chapter
13.15.1 and 13.15.2.)
Procedure
1. Disconnect the encoder reader head cable (A) attached to J23 at the circuit board on
the C-arm. See Figure 126.
2. Note how the encoder cable is routed from J23 all the way to the encoder.
3. Note the location of the cable straps securing the encoder cable (and in some places
other cables as well).
It is important that the new encoder reader head and encoder cable are
Notice routed and secured exactly the same way as the old reader head and old
cable.
4. Cut the cable straps securing the encoder cable.

5. Remove the screws (B) securing the encoder reader head to the scan wagon. See
Figure 126.
6. Carefully remove the encoder reader head and un-route the old encoder cable.
7. Mount the new encoder reader head on the scan wagon. Do not tighten the screws.
8. Route and connect the encoder cable to J23. (Add the cable-adapter if the system is
identified as field-upgraded.)
9. Use cable straps to secure the encoder cable (In some places together with other
cables. See point 3 above.)
10. Adjust the position of the scan movement reader head according to chapter 20.6.2.
1007989 O 166 (322)

Figure 126 Replacing scan movement encoder. (The right image shows cable routing of a field-
upgraded system.)
Outgoing Control
1. Check function of scan movement read head (chapter 15.3).
2. Perform a Scan calibration using the SCS calibration tool
5. Verify the resolution with a line pair phantom according to Quality Control
Procedures [1].
6. Perform an Image field and X-ray field agreement test according to Quality Control
Procedures [1].
1007989 O 167 (322)

13.17 Encoder scale (1015557)

Parts
Part.No Name Qty
1015557 Encoder scale 1
Tools
1015564 Scale applicator including a 1mm Allen key
2.5 mm Allen key (for temporarily removing the encoder)
Alcohol (For cleaning the surface before mounting the new encoder scale.)
Preparation
Procedure Remove encoder and old encoder scale

1. Mark the end position of the old encoder scale with a pencil. (The end nearest the
motor bracket.)
2. Remove the old encoder scale.
3. Use alcohol to clean the surface where the encoder scale will be mounted.
4. Make sure the surface is dry.
5. Remove the two Allen screws securing the encoder to the encoder bracket and
remove the encoder.
1007989 O 168 (322)

Procedure install the scale applicator

1. Mount the scale applicator using the two Allen screws from step 5. Be careful to
check that the readhead and the scale applicator have the same orientation as the
readhead does not lie centrally over the scale. See Figure 127.
Figure 127 How to position scale applicator and how to route the scale through the scale applicator.
2. Remove the splitter screw from the scale applicator. See Figure 127.
3. Move the scan mechanics to the end stop at the scan motor bracket.
4. Separate the backing paper from the first 40 mm of scale and feed it into the scale
applicator as shown in Figure 127.
5. Remount the splitter screw (A) so that the backing paper pass around the splitter
screw. See Figure 127.
6. Push the scale carefully through the scale applicator to mark indicating the position of
the original encoder scale. Make sure that the encoder scale does not stick to the
mounting surface until it is in position.
7. Attach the end of the scale to the mounting surface with light finger pressure.
Procedure apply the scale

1. Move the scan movement mechanics through its full travel at slow, steady speed.
While moving
a. apply a light finger pressure to the scale behind the scale guide to attach it to
the mounting surface.
b. gently pull the backing paper away from in front of the scale guide as it is
separated automatically.
1007989 O 169 (322)

Procedure remove the scale applicator

1. When the scan movement mechanics has reached the limit of its travel, unbolt the
scale applicator from its bracket. Make sure that the scan movement mechanics does
not move during this operation.
2. Withdraw the scale guide along the scale whilst applying the remaining scale using
light finger pressure. Ensure complete adhesion of the scale to the mounting surface
by applying firm finger pressure along the full length of the scale from the centre
outwards to each end
Procedure finishing and testing

1. Remount the encoder.
2. Verify function of the encoder readhead according to chapter 15.3.
3. Perform a scan calibration according to chapter 10.1.11.
1007989 O 170 (322)

13.18 Upper curtain (1010549)

Preparation
Make sure that there are no damages on the new curtain roll.
Rotate the C-arm 90 degrees clockwise or anti-clockwise.
Open both left and right side doors.
Procedure remove roll

1. Remove the curtain rail, A, shown in Figure 128.
2. Remove the two Allen screws, B, securing the curtain to the rotation hub.
3. Carefully open the fork, C, using a screwdriver or similar.
4. Remove the curtain roll.
Figure 128 Replace upper curtain.
Procedure mount roll

1. Roll up the new curtain completely
2. Slide the pin into the hole. See D.
3. Put the other pin in the fork, see C.
4. Tighten the roll using an Allen key. (About five revolutions.)
5. Push the pin, C, into the inner position of the fork. Pinch the fork using a tongs.
6. Stretch out and secure the curtain to the rotation hub using two Allen screws, see B.
7. Mount the curtain rail, see A.
1007989 O 171 (322)

13.19 Lower curtain (1010549)

Preparation
Make sure that there are no damages on the new curtain roll.
Rotate the C-arm 90 degrees clockwise or anti-clockwise
Open both left and right side doors.
Procedure remove roll

1. Remove the curtain rail, A, shown in Figure 129.
2. Remove the two Allen screws, B, securing the curtain to the rotation hub.
3. Carefully open the fork, C, using a screwdriver or similar.
4. Remove the curtain roll.
Figure 129 Replace lower curtain.
Procedure mount roll

1. Roll up the new curtain completely
2. Slide the pin into the hole. See D.
3. Put the other pin in the fork, see C.
4. Tighten the roll using an Allen key. (About five revolutions.)
5. Push the pin, C, into the inner position of the fork. Pinch the fork using a tongs.
6. Stretch out and secure the curtain to the rotation hub using two Allen screws, see B.
7. Mount the curtain rail, see A.
1007989 O 172 (322)

13.20 Compression pedal (1018052)

Preparation
Open the right door of the stand. The foot switch cables are connected to the two
D-sub connectors on the terminal plate in the mammography stand.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the cable of the desired compression pedal and route the cable through the
slot on the lower part of the back panel.
2. In a similar manner route and connect the cable of the new compression pedal to the
same D-sub connector.
3. Close the door of the stand.
4. Test the function of the new compression pedal (up, down, compression done).
Figure 130 Foot switch connectors on terminal plate (X12 and X13).
1007989 O 173 (322)

13.21 Compression motor (1010589)

Preparation
Remove the Front cover, Face protection shield and right Side cover. See Section 8 for
instructions.
Press the Emergency stop button
1. Disconnect the encoder cable of the compression motor. See 1 in Figure 131.
2. Disconnect the power cable of the compression motor. See 2.
3. Loosen the three Allen screws using a 2.5 mm Allen key.
Figure 131 Replacing the compression motor.
Procedure - assembling
1. Mount the compression motor with the encoder aligned as shown in Figure 131.
2. Tighten the three 2.5 mm Allen screws at 1.2 Nm using a torque tool.
3. Connect the power cable of the compression motor, see 2.
4. Connect the encoder cable of the compression motor, see 1.
5. Check that the compression motor can move easily between its end positions.
1007989 O 174 (322)

13.22 Compression force compensation spring (1005245)

Parts
1005245 Compression Force Compensation Spring
Tools
Needle Nose pliers
Procedure
When attaching the new spring the compression force mass must be held
Notice
up in order to stretch the spring as little as possible.
1. Use needle nose pliers (A) when mounting the spring and hold the spring by its loop
(B) and never by the coil. Use only the tips of the pliers, otherwise the loop may get
flattened. See Figure 132.
Figure 132 Replacing the compression force compensation spring.
Outgoing control and calibrations

1. Check that the mounted spring does not rub against the aluminium block.
2. Perform a calibration of the
compression height (Chapter 10.1.14)
compression switch (Chapter 10.1.15)
compression force (Chapter 10.1.16)
3. Verify that the SCS-parameter Lowspeed limit is set to 50. See chapter 10.2.1.
4. Calibrate all compression paddles according to chapter 11.3.8.
1007989 O 175 (322)

13.23 Collimator motor (1010592)

Preparation
Remove the Front cover, Face protection shield and covers. See chapter 8 for
instructions.
Press the emergency stop button.
Figure 133 Replacing the collimator motor.
1. Disconnect the encoder cable from J17 (A).
2. Disconnect the DC cable (B).
3. Cut the cable strap (C) securing the DC and encoder cables to the C-arm.
4. Cut the cable strap (D) securing the DC and encoder cables to the cable tie base.
5. Carefully route the DC and encoder cables out from the C-arm.
6. Loosen the upper Allen screw (E) of the axis coupling securing the collimator motor
axis.
7. Loosen the six Allen screws (F) securing the motor to the chassis and carefully
remove the motor.
1007989 O 176 (322)

Figure 134 Strapping of encoder cable to the collimator motor.
Procedure - reassembling
1. Mount the encoder cable on the new collimator motor. See Figure 134.
2. Secure the encoder cable to the collimator motor using cable straps. See Figure 134.
3. Insert the motor axis of the collimator motor into the axis coupling.
4. Tighten the six Allen screws (F in Figure 134.) of the collimator motor.
5. Tighten the Allen screw (E) of the axis coupling,.
6. Route and connect the DC cable (B) of the collimator motor. See Figure 134.
7. Route and connect the encoder cable (A) to J17 on the circuit board. See Figure
134 for routing.
8. Secure the DC and encoder cables to the C-arm using a cable strap (C).
9. Secure the DC and encoder cables to the cable tie base using a cable strap (D).
10. Remount Front cover, Face protection shield and covers.
Calibrations
1. Collimator height (chapter 10.1.9)
2. Collimator collision (chapter 10.1.12)
Outgoing control check motor currents

1. Plot collimator motor currents (chapter 15.4.2).
2. Check idle currents of the collimator movement motor. (chapter 15.5.1).
1007989 O 177 (322)

13.24 Collimator motor bracket (1015552) + screw (1010591) +

motor (1010592)
When replacing the collimator motor bracket and/or Collimator lead

screw, the collimator motor can be replaced at the same time. I.e. this
chapter also describes collimator motor replace when the collimator motor
Notice bracket is removed from the scan arm.
These three parts are included in the collimator movement upgrade kit
1015272.
13.24.1 Disassemble the old collimator motor and collimator screw
Tools
Allen keys 3 and 4 mm
Cutting Pliers
Preparation
Remove the Front cover, Face protection shield and covers. See Section 8 for
instructions.
Figure 135 Removing the collimator motor bracket.
1007989 O 178 (322)

Procedure remove collimator motor bracket

1. Disconnect the encoder cable (A), see Figure 135.
2. Cut off the plastic strap (B) securing the DC cable and disconnect the DC cable (C).
3. Remove the four Allen screws securing the connector bracket (D).
4. Remove the four screws securing the motor bracket (E).
5. Lift off motor with cables, motor bracket, connector bracket and screw.
13.24.2 Mount the spare part on the scan arm
Parts
Part.no Name Qty
1015272 Collimator Mov. upgr. kit L30 1
1015538 Cable strap 75 mm (B) 2
1000776 Cable strap (C) 1
1007258* Encoder cable 1
* A part of 1015272.
Tools
2.5, 3 and 4 mm Allen keys/bits
Preparation
Move the collimator mechanics just under its uppermost position.
Figure 136 Mount the spare part on the C-arm.
1007989 O 179 (322)

Procedure
Notice Do not use parts like washers and screws from old assembly.
1. Mount the encoder cable (A) and the two cable straps (B) on the encoder. Cut the
ends of the straps after tightening.
2. Mount the cable strap (C) on the encoder. Cut the end of the strap after tightening.
3. Mount the preassembled Collimator movement upgrade kit on the scan arm using
the four Allen screws (D). Tool: 4 mm Allen key.
4. Mount the connector bracket on the pre collimator bracket using the four Allen
screws with washers (E). Tool: 3 mm Allen key.
5. Loosen each and one of the four screws of (D), (E) and (F) a little bit. About
revolution, i.e. 90 degrees counter clockwise. (The reason is that the parts should be
secured, but allow a certain amount of movement/adjustment in the following
operations.)
13.24.3 Adjust the position of the motor bracket
Tools
90 Torque wrench , with 4 mm Allen bits.
4 mm Allen key
Figure 137 Adjusting the position of the motor bracket.
1007989 O 180 (322)

Procedure
1. Move the collimator movement mechanics down and up 3-5 times.
(To its lowest position and up just under its top end position.)
This action will adjust the position of the motor bracket.
2. Tighten the two Allen screws at 5.7 Nm (A). (I.e. located diagonal)
3. Move the collimator movement mechanics down and up 3-5 times. The movement
should be smooth throughout the whole movement.
4. Tighten the two Allen screws at 5.7 Nm (B). (I.e. located diagonal)
5. Repeat step 3.
Outgoing control
Move the collimator movement mechanics down and up 3-5 times. (To its lowest position and
up just under its top end position.) This action will adjust the position of the motor bracket.
13.24.4 Adjust the position of the collimator screw in the

connector bracket
Tools
Torque screw driver, with 2.5 mm Allen bits.
2.5 mm Allen key
Figure 138 Adjusting the position of the collimator screw in the connector bracket.
1007989 O 181 (322)

It is very important that the mechanics does not reach the top end position
Notice
during the movement.
Procedure
1. Move the collimator movement mechanics up just under its top end position.
2. Tighten the two Allen screws (A) at 1.2 Nm. (I.e. located diagonal)
3. Move the collimator movement mechanics down and up 3-5 times. The movement
should be smooth throughout the whole movement.
4. Tighten the two Allen screws (B) at 1.2 Nm. (I.e. located diagonal)
5. Repeat step 3.
Outgoing control
Smooth movement of the collimator movement mechanics. If not, loosen the screws a little bit
and repeat this section again.
13.24.5 Adjust the position of the connector bracket
Parts
Part.no Name Qty
1014247 Grease KSS MSG No.1 Lithium 0.05 1
Tools
90 Torque wrench with 3 mm Allen bits.
3 mm Allen key
Protective gloves
It is very important that the mechanics does not reach the top end position
Notice
during the movement.
Procedure
1. Move the collimator movement
mechanics up just under its top end
position.
2. Tighten the two upper Allen screws at
2.9 Nm (A).
3. Lubricate the whole screw using
1014247 Grease KSS MSG No.1
Lithium 0.05. Use protective gloves.
4. Move the collimator movement
mechanics down and up 3-5 times. The
movement should be smooth throughout
the whole movement.
5. Tighten the two lower Allen screws at
2.9 Nm (B). Figure 139 Adjusting the position of the connector
bracket.
6. Repeat step 4.
1007989 O 182 (322)

Outgoing control manual movement

1. Smooth movement of the collimator movement mechanics. If not, loosen the screws a
little bit and repeat this section again.
2. Test the deviation of the collimator screw relative the scan arm (chapter 15).
Calibrations
1. Collimator height (chapter 10.1.9)
2. Collimator collision (chapter 10.1.12)
3. Automatic Collimator Alignment, ACA (chapter 11.3.2).
4. Full Calibration according to Quality Control Procedures [1].
Outgoing control check motor currents

1. Plot collimator motor currents (chapter 15.4.2).
2. Check idle currents of the collimator movement motor (chapter 15.5.1)
1007989 O 183 (322)

13.25 Motor, Z-height (1010582)

Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007022 and mechanical drawing
1010863 in the service binder.
Preparation
Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker.
Open left and right door of the stand.
Additional material
Two metal clamps.
1. Remove the two clamps mounted inside the left main beam. See Figure 143.
2. Mount the clamps2 under the housing of the C-arm. See Figure 140.
Figure 140 Mounting clamps on (a) the left and (b) right side of the housing.
Warning!
It is extremely important that the two clamps are mounted under the C-arm
height/rotation-unit before removing the height motor. This to prevent the
housing and C-arm to fall headlong to the floor when the motor is
removed.
3. Measure and mark the cables before disconnecting from the connector. It is
recommended to use a multimeter for the measurements.
Warning! It is important to measure and mark the cables in order to avoid

unexpected and thereby dangerous movements of the C-arm. Measure both
the cables of the old motor and the cables mounted on the mammography
stand. (I.e. it is not sufficient to solely rely on the existing colour coding of
the cables.)
4. Disconnect the power and encoder cables.
2
If the metal clamps are not available, place e.g. a wood board between the C-arm housing and the
lower horizontal beam to prevent the C-arm from falling down when the motor is removed.
1007989 O 184 (322)

5. Remove the upper end of the wire

sensor for the z-height by unscrewing
the Allen screw. See Figure 141.
6. Unscrew the four Allen screws
(MC6S 8.8 M6x16) securing the
motor to the housing. See Figure 142.
7. Remove the motor.
8. Compare the old motor with the new.
(Double check that they are identical
Figure 141 Removing the wire sensor screw.
and have the same part number.)
1. Insert the new motor. (The motor needs to be
rotated so that the pin and gear will mesh.)
2. Secure the motor using the four Allen screws.
See Figure 142.
3. Route and connect the power and decoder
cables. See Figure 144.
4. Remount the upper part of the wire sensor. See
Figure 141.
5. Double check that all parts are properly
connected and secured.
6. Remove the clamps. Figure 142 Removing the height motor.
7. Remount the clamps inside the left main beam. See

Figure 143.
Perform both Height calibration (chapter 10.1.7) and

Tests after maintenance or service (chapter 14).
Figure 143 Remounting clamps inside

left main beam.
1007989 O 185 (322)

Circuit diagram
Figure 144 Circuit diagram for height motor and C-arm rotation motor.
1007989 O 186 (322)

13.26 Motor, rotation (1010583)

Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007022 and mechanical drawing
1010863 in the service binder.
Preparation
Rotate the C-arm upside-down (i.e. lowest possible centre of
gravity in order to prevent undesired movements of the C-arm
when the motor is removed).
Shut down the system and turn of the main circuit breaker.
Open left and right door of the stand.
1. Disconnect the pre-assembled power cable of the motor.
2. Unscrew the four Allen screws (MC6S 8.8 M6x16) securing the motor to the housing.
Use extension tool.
3. Remove the motor.
The new motor is inserted in reverse order.
Calibration
Perform a calibration of the C-rotation (chapter 10.1.8).
Outgoing Control
Perform Tests after maintenance or service (chapter 14).
1007989 O 187 (322)

13.27 Wire Sensor, Z-height (1010579)

Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007022 and mechanical drawing 1010863 in the service binder.
Tools
3 mm Allen key with rounded head.
Torque wrench with 3 mm Allen bits.
Preparation
Push the Emergency Stop button.
Open the right side door of the mammography stand.
Figure 145 Replace wire sensor for the height movement.
1. While holding on to the upper part of the wire (A), remove the Allen screw (B)
securing the wire to the motor housing (C). Save the Allen screw.
2. Let the wire sensor house (D) slowly rewind the wire.
3. Disconnect the cable (E).
4. Remove the two 4 mm Allen screws (F) securing the wire sensor house (D) to the
frame. Lift off the wire sensor.
1. Mount the new wire sensor to the frame using the two 4 mm Allen screws (F). Secure
the Allen screws at 2.9 Nm.
2. Connect the cable (E).
3. Secure the upper part of the wire to the motor housing at 2.9 Nm.
1007989 O 188 (322)

Calibration
Perform a height calibration (chapter 10.1.7).
Outgoing Control
13.28 Wire Sensor, C-rotation

Related drawings
See electrical drawing 1007022 and mechanical drawing 1010863 in the service binder.
Tools
2.5 and 3 mm Allen key with rounded head.
Preparation
Rotate the C-arm to +45, and run the C-arm to lowest position downward. This is the
ideal position for mounting of the wire sensor.
Push the emergency stop button.
Open both side doors of the mammography stand
Prepare the new wire sensor according to Figure 146.
Figure 146 Pre-assembly of wire sensor.
Be careful not to expose the cable for excessive strain at the connection to
Notice
the wire sensor housing..
1007989 O 189 (322)

Figure 147 Rotation pipe seen from right side of stand.
5. Remove the Allen screw (A) securing the wire to the cable rotation pipe (B). Save the
Allen screw.
6. Let the wire sensor slowly rewind the wire.
7. Disconnect the cable connector (E), see Figure 148.
8. Remove the screws (D) holding the cable clamp (C) and the wire sensor. Lift of the
wire sensor.
1007989 O 190 (322)

Figure 148 Replacement Wire sensor seen from back
1. Mount the new wire sensor with mounting plate (F) and the cable clamp (C) to the
motor housing (G) using the two 4 mm Allen screws with flange (D).
2. Route the cable trough the cable clamp (C) such as it is positioned under the wire
sensor as indicated in Figure 148.
3. Secure the Allen screws (D) to the motor housing (G).
4. Connect the cable connector (E).
5. Route the wire around the cable rotation pipe (B). Ensure that the wire is positioned
within the groove. See Figure 147.
When securing the wire to the cable rotation pipe, be careful not to
Notice damage the aluminium threading. Use Loctite to prevent the Allen screw
from loosening.
6. Secure the upper part of the wire using the Allen screw (A). Apply a small amount of
Loctite 243 to prevent the screw from loosening.
Calibration
Check the wire position in the cable rotation pipe by moving the C-arm angle
Perform a C-rotation calibration (chapter 10.1.8).
Outgoing Control
1007989 O 191 (322)

13.29 Fan unit (1010556)

1. Disconnect the power cable of the fan unit.
2. Loosen (do not remove) the two screws securing the fan unit.
3. Remove the fan unit.
Figure 149 Replacing the fan unit. (The image shows main cabinet without back plate. It is
not necessary to remove the back plate in order to replace the fan unit.)
1. Mount the fan unit on the two screws.
2. Tighten the screws.
3. Connect the power cable of the fan unit.
1007989 O 192 (322)

13.30 Detector cooler (1010595 or 1018944)

Preparation
Power down the system and switch off the main switch.
Tools
19 mm fixed key or spanner
Hose clamp pliers
Side cutter
Additional material
PTFE tape
Hose clamps
Always wear safety gloves and protective goggles when handling the water
coolant mixture.
Caution!
Do not operate the detector cooler without enough cooling fluid in the
tank.
1. Close the ballofix couplings of the hoses located near the main cabinet.
2. If the foldable rails were removed for storage on site at installation, mount the rails
back on the rails in the side cabinet.
1007989 O 193 (322)

4. Pull out the detector cooler on the rails, see Figure 150.
Figure 150 Detector cooler pulled out on the rails in work position.
5. Tap the detector cooler from cooling fluid, see section 9.2.18. This must be done in
order to prevent leakage during transport.
6. Disconnect the fluid hoses from the connection pipes on the back of the detector
cooler.
7. If the Lauda detector cooler is used: Disconnect the power cable of the detector cooler
from F10 and the X6-PE terminal. Note how the cables are connected and routed. If
the SMC detector cooler is used, disconnect the power cable from the back of the
detector cooler.
8. Gently pull out the cable from the cable guides.
9. Roll the detector cooler back into the side cabinet.
10. Angle the rails and roll the detector cooler down the rails, see Figure 151.
Figure 151 The detector cooler rolled out on angled rails.
1007989 O 194 (322)

11. Place the detector cooler in the packing of the new spare part detector cooler. Since
the cooler might leak if it tilted, make sure that the top of the packing is marked up
in order to prevent leakage.
1. If the available mains voltage is not 230 V, make sure that the mains transformer T1
is configured for the available voltage, see System Installation Manual [4].
2. Roll the new detector cooler on the angled rails into the side cabinet, see Figure 151.
Position the rails into work position and roll the detector cooler out on the rails, see
Figure 150.
3. If a Lauda detector cooler is replaced with a SMC detector cooler, put the hose
clamps around the fluid hoses and connect the fluid hoses to the detector cooler. For
the Lauda detector cooler, the outlet connection pipe (A) should be mounted at 7
oclock in order to enable free operation of the tap (B), see Figure 152. Use a pair of
hose clamp pliers to tighten the hose clamps.
Figure 152 Mounting the connection pipes of the Lauda detector cooler.
4. If the Lauda detector cooler is used, route the power cable of the detector unit inside
the side cabinet and connect the cable to F10 and the X6-PE terminal. If the SMC
detector cooler is used, connect the power cable to the back of the detector cooler.
Note: Verify that the ground connection is maximum 0.1 .
5. Roll the detector cooler into the side cabinet.
6. Unscrew the four screws of the foldable rails, remove the rails and store them on site.
7. If the SMC detector cooler is used, screw the bracket holding the detector cooler back
in place.
8. Open the ballofix couplings.
9. Fill the detector cooler with cooling fluid and start the system, see chapter 5.
10. Check that the temperature set point is set to 20.0C. If not, adjust the set point to
20.0C according to the instructions in sections 10.5.1 (for Lauda) or 10.6.2 (for
SMC).
11. Perform tests after maintenance and service, see chapter 14.
1007989 O 195 (322)

13.31 Control board for Lauda detector cooler (1020416)

Preparation
Power down the system and switch off the fixed main switch.
Pull out the detector cooler on the rails.
Procedure
1. If the detector cooler has side panels, unscrew the two screws in the upper corners of
each side panel, disconnect the yellow/green ground cables and lift off the side
panels.
2. Unscrew the four screws holding the detector cooler top cover in place. Disconnect
the yellow/green ground cable and lift of the top cover.
1007989 O 196 (322)

3. Note the positions of each of the cables connected to the old control board, see
illustration and table below.
Connector Connected Position Cable
component colour
X1 Display 1 White
2 Brown
3 Green
4 Yellow
X2 Transformer 1 Brown
2 Black
3 Blue
4 -
X3 On/off switch 1 Violet
2 -
3 Black
4 -
X4 On/off switch 1 Blue
2 Brown
Mains cable 3 Blue
4 Brown
X5 Pump 1 Brown
2 Blue
3 -
4 -
X6 Compressor 1 Brown
2 Black
3 Grey
4 -
4. Disconnect each of the cables connected to the control board by pressing down the
corresponding locking tab with a flat screwdriver or similar and pulling out the cable.
5. Unscrew the four screws in the corners of the old control board and lift off the old
control board. Dispose the old control board according to local regulations.
6. Position the new control board and screw the four screws in the corners of the control
board.
1007989 O 197 (322)

7. Connect each of the cables to the new control board. Make sure to connect each of the
cables to the same position as on the old control board. Carefully pull the cable to
make sure that it is properly connected.
8. Re-connect the yellow/green ground cable of the detector cooler top cover, and screw
the top cover back on. Note that no side panels should be mounted.
13.32 Side cabinet water cooling (1007296)

For technical data, see ref Technical specification ref [3].
Preparation
Shut down the system and turn off the main circuit breaker, F2.
Turn of both incoming and outgoing water.
Procedure remove old water cooling unit

In order to remove the water cooling unit to the front door of the side cabinet, follow the
instructions below:
1. Disconnect the electrical cables from terminal X6-PE and fuse F14.
2. Disconnect the water hoses under the water cooling unit. Save the copper washers for
future use. (1012546 Copper washer 12x18x1.5)
3. Remove the four nuts with washers securing the water cooling unit to the side cabinet.
4. Slide the cooling unit off the four pins.
Figure 153 Mounting the water cooling unit to the front door of the side cabinet.
1007989 O 198 (322)

Procedure mount new water cooling unit

In order to attach the water cooling unit to the front door of the side cabinet, follow the
instructions below:
1. Slide the new cooling unit on to the pins (as shown in Figure 153) and secure the unit
with the included washers and nuts.
2. Mount 10x15 D-nipples (1009380) on the water cooling unit. Use
Thread seal Loctite 577 (1009304) between cooler and D-nipples.
3. Mount the water hoses on the nipples. Use copper washers (1012546)
between hoses and D-nipples.
4. Turn on both incoming and outgoing water.
Check all hoses and connections for leakage. (In case of leakage,
Notice
immediately turn the cooler OFF and solve the problem.)
5. Connect electrical cables from the water cooling unit to:Terminal X6-PE and fuse
F14.
6. Turn on the main circuit breaker, F2 and power up the system.
7. Perform tests after maintenance and service. See chapter 14.
13.33 Side cabinet air cooling (1007296)

See System Installation Manual, ref [4].
13.34 Power supply unit (1019118 or 1020574)

Tools
Screwdriver;
3 mm Allen key;
Torque wrench with 3mm Allen bits;
Multimeter
Preparation
Power down the system and switch off the fixed main switch.
Open the side doors of the main cabinet.
Remove the display cover, see chapter 8.5.
Remove the SCS board and box, see steps 1-4 in chapter 13.8.
Procedure remove old power supply units

1. Disconnect the cables from the primary and secondary side of the power supply unit
to be replaced, see Figure 155.
2. Remove the four Allen screws securing the power supply to the frame, see (A) or (B)
in Figure 154 depending on which one of the power supply units that shall be
replaced.
1007989 O 199 (322)

Figure 154 Screws securing the power supplies to the frame. Four screws for the upper
power supply (A), and four screws for the lower power supply (B).
3. Lift off the power supply unit to be replaced.
Procedure mount new power supply unit

1. Position the new power supply unit in the frame.
2. Screw the four Allen screws holding the new power supply unit at 2.9 Nm.
3. Connect the cables to the new power supply unit, see Figure 155
4. Remount the SCS board and box, see chapter 13.8.
5. Remount the display cover, see chapter 8.5.
Procedure power up the system

1. Follow the detailed instructions for starting up the system described in chapter 5.1,
5.2 and 5.4 respectively.
Outgoing control and tests
If the upper power supply unit (A) has been replaced:

1. Verify the PSU output voltage 28V (2%) on the K13 connector.
2. Compare the status of the LEDs of the SCS with Explanation of LEDs on the SCS
unit found in section 20.4, i.e. look for potential errors related to the power supply
and/or miss fitted cables.
When the lower power supply unit (B) has been replaced:
1. Verify the PSU output voltage 48V to the detector unit and 24V and 5V (2%) on the
K13 connector.
2. Compare the status of the LEDs of the SCS with Explanation of LEDs on the SCS
unit found in section 20.4, i.e. look for potential errors related to the power supply
and/or miss fitted cables.
1007989 O 200 (322)

Figure 155 Diagram of connections to power supply units.
1007989 O 201 (322)

13.35 Current limiter (1020443)

Tools
Screwdriver
3 mm Allen key
Torque wrench with 3mm Allen bits.
Preparation
1. Power down the system and switch off the fixed main switch.
2. Open the right side door of the main cabinet.
Procedure remove old current limiter

1. Loosen the four screws holding the cables connected to the current limiter and
disconnect the cables (see Figure 156).
2. Note the identity and positions of the cables for the following reconnection.
3. Loosen and remove the holding screw of the Current Limiter.
4. Remove the Current Limiter.
Procedure Mount new current limiter

1. Position the Current Limiter and mount the screw to secure it in position, (see Figure
156).
Figure 156 Current limiter in position

2. Reattach the 4 cables to the current limiter.
1007989 O 202 (322)

13.36 Adapter board (1012231, 1012232, 1012233)

Preparation
1. Remove the Front cover, Face protection shield and covers. See chapter 8 for
instructions.
Procedure
1. Follow instructions for ESD-protection (chapter 13.1).
Disconnect the cables to the old board and remove the board.
Mount the new board and connect the cables.
Remount Front cover, Face protection shield and covers.
Perform Tests after Maintenance and service (chapter 14).
Figure 157 Lower cable adapter board (1012231)
Figure 158 Upper left cable adapter board (1012232)
Figure 159 Upper right cable adapter board (1012233)
1007989 O 203 (322)

13.37 Time delay relay (1013013)

There are two time delay relays in the side cabinet. One for start up and one for shut down.
The start up relay secures that the power from the 3-phase transformer stabilizes before other
systems start up. The shut down relay secures that the Acquisition Workstation get enough
time to shut down before the side cabinet cuts the power.
Preparation
1. Shut down the system (chapter 6.1).
2. Cut the power to the system (chapter 6.2).
3. Open the front door of the side cabinet.
Figure 160 (A) Shut down relay, 120 seconds.

(B) Power up relay, 20 seconds
Procedure
1. Disconnect the desired relay by carefully pulling the relay out from the quick
coupling.
2. Set the correct time on the new relay.
3. 120 seconds for shut down relay (A).
4. 20 seconds for power up relay (B).
5. Mount the new relay.
6. Start up the system (chapter 5.1, 5.2 and 5.4). Check the operation of the start-up
relay by timing the relay after pressing the ON-button on the main cabinet. (The small
green LED of the power-up relay starts flashing. After 20 seconds the LED should be
lit, i.e. fixed light.)
7. Close the rear door of the side cabinet.
8. Perform tests after maintenance or service (chapter 14).
1007989 O 204 (322)

13.38 Thermostat (1013014)

The thermostat secures that the temperature inside the side cabinet does not exceed 50C.
Preparation
1. Shut down the system (chapter 6.1).
2. Cut the power to the system (chapter 6.2).
3. Open the rear door of the side cabinet.
Figure 161 Thermostat for overheat protection.
Procedure
4. Disconnect the two wires under the thermostat.
5. Remove the thermostat.
6. Set the temperature to 50C on the new thermostat.
7. Mount the new thermostat.
8. Re-connect the two wires.
9. Close the rear door of the side cabinet.
10. Start up the system (chapter 5.1, 5.2 and 5.4).
11. Perform tests after maintenance or service (chapter 14).
1007989 O 205 (322)

13.39 Fan motor exchange including removal of side panels of

Lauda detector cooler (1007030)
Preparation
Standard service engineer tools are sufficient for this exchange. Estimated time required to
perform the complete procedure is 2 h including return management.
Return requests for old part

Fill out the Spare Part return form and specify explicitly if the motor had broken down
completely or if it was exchanged preventively.
Pay extra attention to fill out the serial number of the Lauda cooler. This as Philips needs to
update their records on which units are fitted with spare components. Poorly filled in return
forms and the extra work needed for this management at Philips will be charged according to
normal rates.
Requests on Service Record updates

The Service Records for the machines are to be updated after motor exchange and removal of
the side panels (just as normal that is!). Provide HD ID and cooler s/n as well as a short
description of the reason for the exchange.
Procedure
1. Turn off the stand and cooler by tripping the F10 and F15 fuses in the side cabinet.
2. Roll the detector cooler onto the rails.
3. Remove the side panels of the cooler by unscrewing the two screws. Make sure you
have enough room on both sides of the cooler to be able to work in a good manner.
Note: The side panels are not to be reassembled anymore store on site if possible or
throw away according to local recycling guidelines!
1007989 O 206 (322)

4. Disconnect the ground wires on both panels.
Figure 162 Electrical connection of fan within the starter box of compressor
5. Open the cable connection box positioned at the compressor. To open the box, open
the click-lock at the bottom of the box using a flat screwdriver, see figure below.
6. Disconnect the old motor wires; blue, brown and earth.
1007989 O 207 (322)

7. Important: Before removing the old motor assembly, mark the position of the motor
holder on both sides using a permanent marker or similar. This will help out a lot in
the alignment process.
8. Unscrew the old fan motor assembly.
9. Unscrew the old motor from its holder.

10. Unscrew the fan blade from the old motor. Note the way it was fitted on the old motor
to enable correct assembly on the new motor.
Note: The correct rotation direction is marked on the fan blades by an arrow.
1007989 O 208 (322)

Figure 163 The Fan blade is fixed with a central screw and positioned by a catching mount.
11. Mount the fan blade onto the new motor.
12. Mount the new motor into the motor holder.
13. Mount the motor back in the cooler. Position the motor using the marks made in step
7.
14. Align the fan assembly in the cooler by spinning the fan blades by hand and make
sure that no blades touch the condenser metal opening. Reposition if necessary until a
good position is found, that is, no blades are touching the condenser opening.
15. Connect the new motor wires to the correct terminals in the connection box; use
correct crimp terminals if needed.
16. Close the connection box.
17. Ensure that the fan motor is running and that the air is sucked into the cooler through
the condenser when restoring F10. Also, pay attention to any noise as described in
step 14.
18. If step 17 is unsuccessful go through the steps above again to locate the fault.
Verification
19. Restore F15 and let the system start up normally.
20. Perform a Full Calibration when the detector has completed its warm up period
(15 minutes).
21. Roll the detector cooler, without its side panels, back into the side cabinet.
22. Perform Tests after maintenance and service according to the Service Manual for
respective modality.
23. Report any unwanted behaviour to product support.
Expected result
Tests after maintenance and service are completed successfully and the system operates
normally for at least 30 min.
1007989 O 209 (322)

13.40 Fibre Optic Transceiver, L30 Detector

13.40.1 Removing the Fibre Optic Transceiver
1. Unlock the fibre optic transceiver by folding the handle upwards.
Typically this would release the fibre optic transceiver but the mechanics
Notice
may prevent the locking mechanism to open.
1007989 O 210 (322)

2. Grab the handle on the fibre optic transceiver and pull it straight out while using
gentle force. If it is not removed easily, use a screwdriver to push the locking
mechanism downwards in order to release the fibre optic transceiver. A clicking
sound should be heard. Then remove the optic transceiver.
Be careful when doing this so that the detector or the fibre optic
Caution
transceiver is not damaged.
1007989 O 211 (322)

13.40.2 Mounting the Fibre Optic Transceiver

1. Insert the fibre optic transceiver according to the pictures below.
1007989 O 212 (322)

Lock the fibre optic transceiver by folding the handle backwards until it makes a clicking
sound.
1007989 O 213 (322)

13.41 Temperature sensor PT1 in SMC detector cooler

(1019131)
Tools and material
PTFE tape
10 mm fixed key
24 mm fixed key
Preparations
Close the ballofix couplings near the main cabinet before emptying the detector cooler,
see section 9.2.18.
Remove the top cover and the right side panel, see section 8.11.
Illustration
Figure 164 Detailed view of temperature sensor PT1 and PT1 connector. Parts indicated in the
illustration are: PT1 connector (A), mainboard (B), temperature sensor (C), threads (D)
and grommet (E).
Remove the old temperature sensor

1. Disconnect the PT1 connector (A) from the mainboard (B).
2. Unscrew the PT1 temperature sensor (C) using a 10 mm fixed key.
1007989 O 214 (322)

Mount the new temperature sensor

1. Apply PTFE tape to the threads (D) of the temperature sensor and screw the
temperature sensor in place using a 10 mm fixed key and a 24 mm fixed key.
Do not apply the PTFE tape to the first thread. Otherwise, the PTFE tape
will spread to the circulating circuit and cause the product to fail. To
Tip
prevent dust from getting caught in the threads, check there is no dust on
the threads before the sensor is mounted.
2. Route the cable through the grommet (E).

3. Connect the PT1 connector (A) of the temperature sensor.
Mount the top cover and the right side panel of the detector cooler back in place.
Open the ballofix couplings near the main cabinet.
1007989 O 215 (322)

13.42 Temperature sensor PT2 in SMC detector cooler

(1019131)
Tools and material
PTFE tape
10 mm fixed key
24 mm fixed key
Preparations
see section 9.2.18.
Illustration
Figure 165 Detailed view of temperature sensor PT2 and PT2 connector. Parts indicated in the
illustration are: PT2 connector (A), mainboard (B), temperature sensor (C), threads (D)
and grommet (E).
Remove the old temperature sensor

1. Disconnect the PT2 connector (A) from the mainboard (B).
2. Unscrew the PT2 temperature sensor (C) using a 10 mm fixed key.
1007989 O 216 (322)

Mount the new temperature sensor

1. Apply PTFE tape to the threads (D) of the temperature sensor and screw the
temperature sensor in place using a 10 mm fixed key and a 24 mm fixed key.
Do not apply the PTFE tape to the first thread. Otherwise, the PTFE tape
will spread to the circulating circuit and cause the product to fail. To
Tip
prevent dust from getting caught in the threads, check there is no dust
stuck to the threads before the screw is mounted.
2. Route the cable through the grommet (E).

3. Connect the PT2 connector (A) of the temperature sensor.
4. Mount the top cover and the right side panel of the detector cooler back in place.
5. Open the ballofix couplings near the main cabinet.
1007989 O 217 (322)

13.43 Pump in SMC detector cooler (1019134)

Tools and material
7 mm fixed key
Screwdriver
Grease (included in spare part 1019134)
Interval
Replace the pump at least after 20 000 hours of operation.
Preparations
see section 9.2.18.
Illustration
Figure 166 Detailed view of pump. Parts indicated in the illustration are: four screws holding the
support panel (A), support panel (B), connector of pump cable (C), pump cable (D), power
board (E), ground cable (F), fitting A (G), clip (H), fitting B (I), screws holding the pump
(J), grommet (K).
Remove the old pump

1. Unscrew the four screws (A) of the support panel (B) and lift off the panel.
2. Disconnect the connector (C) of the pump cable (D) from the power board (E).
3. Disconnect the ground cable (F) connected to the pump. Note the positions of the
washers.
4. Place a container beneath fitting A (G) and remove fitting A to drain the pump
5. Remove the clip (H) mounted to fitting B (I) and remove fitting B.
6. Unscrew the two screws (J) holding the pump.
1007989 O 218 (322)

7. Slide the pump out from the detector cooler.
Mount the new pump

1. Mount the two O-rings to the pump, see illustration below. Note that the o-rings are
of different sizes, one is of type P-20 and one is of type P-22.
2. Slide the new pump into position in the detector cooler.

3. Screw the two screws holding the pump in place.
4. Apply grease to fitting A (G) and fitting B (I). Connect both fittings and put the clips
of the fittings back in position.
5. Position the ground cable (F) between the two washers and connect the cable to the
pump.
6. Route the pump cable up through the grommet (K) and connect the connector (C) of
the pump cable to the power board.
7. Put the support panel (B) back and screw the four screws (A) holding the panel in
place.
Mount the top cover and the right side panel back in place.
Start up the system

1. Start up the system according to chapter 5.
Reset the operating time of the pump

Press and hold the MENU key for 2 seconds once again until SE.01 is shown in the PV
display.
Press the SEL key 14 times until the code SE.15 is shown in the PV display.
Press the or key to until YES is shown on the SV display. This indicates that the reset
function is activated.
Confirm by pressing the SEL key.
1007989 O 219 (322)

13.44 Fan in SMC detector cooler (1019135)

Tools and material
Fan motor tool SMC (included in tool kit SMC (1019129)).
Screwdriver, Philips no. 2, max 200 mm.
Interval
Replace the fan at least after 20 000 hours of operation.
Preparations
Remove the top cover, the left side panel and the right side panel, see section 8.11.
Illustration
Figure 167 Detailed view of fan. Parts indicated in the illustration are: fan motor cable (A),
compressor cable connector (B), ground cable (C), capacitor (D), screws holding the fan
(E), fan (F).
Remove the old fan

1. Disconnect the two pins of the fan motor cable (A) from the compressor cable
connector (B) using the Fan motor tool SMC.
2. Disconnect the ground cable(C). Note the positions of the washers.
Disconnect the two cables from the capacitor, unscrew the screw and remove the capacitor
(D).
Unscrew the four screws holding the fan (E) using Philips no. 2 and remove the fan (F).
1007989 O 220 (322)

Mount the new fan

1. Place the new fan in position and screw the four screws of the fan back.
Mount the new capacitor. Connect the red cable to the left and the black cable to the right.
Connect the fan motor cable to the compressor cable connector.
Figure 168 Compressor cable connector.

BK = black, no 1. BL = blue, no 3
Position the ground cable (C) between the two washers and connect the cable.
Mount the top cover and both the side panels of the detector cooler back in place.
Reset the operating time of the fan motor

Press and hold the MENU key for 2 seconds once again until SE.01 is shown in the PV
display.
Press the SEL key 15 times until the code SE.16 is shown in the PV display.
Press the or key to until YES is shown on the SV display. This indicates that the reset
function is activated.
Confirm by pressing the SEL key.
1007989 O 221 (322)

13.45 Level switch in SMC detector cooler (1019133)

Tools and material
Level switch tool SMC (included in tool kit SMC (1019129)).
21 mm fixed key or spanner
Protective gloves
Preparations
see section 9.2.18.
Remove the top cover and the left side panel, see section 8.11.
Illustration
Figure 169 Detailed view of level switch. Parts indicated in the illustration are: level switch pin LS1
(A), mainboard (B), nut (C), tank lid (D), grommet (E).
Remove the old level switch
Always wear protective gloves when in contact with the detector cooling
Caution
fluid.
1. Disconnect the level switch pin LS1 (A) from the mainboard (B) using the level
switch tool SMC.
2. Unscrew the nut (C) using a 21 mm fixed key or a spanner.
3. Unscrew the tank lid (D) and pull out the level switch from the tank.
1007989 O 222 (322)

Mount the new switch

1. Mount the cable tie at approximately 405 mm from the cable end.
2. Unscrew the nut of the level switch.
3. Mount the level switch to the tank and then screw the nut (C). Make sure that the red
marking (F) of the level switch faces upwards.
Figure 170 Red marking on level switch (F).

Route the level switch cable through the grommet (E) and connect the level switch pins to the
connector positions 13 and 2. It does not matter which LS1 connector that is connected to
which socket.
Mount the top cover and the left side panel of the detector cooler back in place.
Screw the tank lid back on.
Start up the system, see chapter 5.
1007989 O 223 (322)

13.46 Pressure sensor in SMC detector cooler (1019132)

Tools and material
17 mm fixed key
PTFE tape
Preparations
see section 9.2.18.
Illustration
Figure 171 Detailed view of pressure sensor. Parts indicated in the illustration are: Connector of
pressure sensor cable (A), pressure sensor (B), threads (C).
Remove the old pressure sensor

1. Disconnect the connector of the pressure sensor cable PS1 (A) from the pressure
sensor (B).
Unscrew the old pressure sensor using a 17 mm fixed key.
Mount the new pressure sensor

1. Apply PTFE tape to the threads (C) of the pressure sensor.
2. Screw the new pressure sensor in position using a 17 mm fixed key.
3. Connect the connector of the pressure sensor cable PS1 (A) to the new pressure
sensor.
4. Mount the top cover and the right side panel of the detector cooler back in place.
5. Open the ballofix couplings near the main cabinet.
6. Start up the system, see chapter 5.
1007989 O 224 (322)

13.47 Dustproof filter in SMC detector cooler (1019130)

Interval
Replace the dustproof filter at least annually.
Remove the old dustproof filter

1. Pull out the lower part of the dustproof filter.
2. Pull the dustproof filter downwards and remove it.
Mount the new dustproof filter

1. Push the new dustproof filter into position. Make sure not to damage the air-cooled
condenser.
1007989 O 225 (322)

14. Tests after maintenance or service

No. Task (User action) Result / Comments Signature
1. Update the backup.
2. Make an exposure:
a._________________
a. Start the Acquisition workstation
software
b._________________
b. Open an examination and create a
test patient
c._________________
c. Make an exposure of a
suitable test phantom.
d._________________
d. Check that the exposure
indicators work correctly:
green light at compression
ready
yellow light during exposure
e._________________
e. Verify that the image quality is
acceptable and check that the X-
ray prevent cover does not mask
the X-ray beam near the chest
wall.*
3. Check for radiation leakage if collimator

or collimator cover was adjusted. (Use
fluorescent paper to detect X-ray
leakage, see section 15.6)
4. Be attentive to noise from height, scan,

compression and collimator movements.
If necessary apply lubricants
(section 9.2.21)
5. Perform a Full calibration.
6. Test the Exam Test Cycle (see section

10.1.19) for at least 1 cycle.
7. Vehicle installation:
a. Check the bolts securing the
following units to the vehicle
chassis: mammography stand, side
cabinet, lead glass and AW-table
b. Check for leakage of cooling fluid
from the detector cooler.
8. Update Service history record.
9. Write a service report for the customer.

* See section 8.1.
1007989 O 226 (322)

15. Other tests

15.1Deviation of collimator screw (relative the scan arm)
Preparation
Remove C-arm covers
Press emergency stop button.
Tools
Vernier calliper (or ruler)
1015473 L-shaped piece of cardboard (A)
Fine pen, preferably a pencil
Figure 172 Measure the deviation of the collimator screw relative the scan arm.
Procedure
1. Move the collimator movement mechanics to its top end position (B), see Figure 172.
Hold the cardboard against the end of the collimator screw (D) and the inner edges (E) of the
cardboard against the scan arm (F).
Mark the lateral position of the collimator screw on the cardboard, both parallel (G) and
perpendicular (H) to the scan arm. (Figure 172 B illustrates the collimator screw when the
collimator mechanics is in its top end position).
Move the collimator movement mechanics to its lowest position (C).
Repeat step 3.
Measure the distance between the two marks on the cardboard parallel to the scan arm using a
vernier calliper (or ruler).
Repeat step 6 for the lines perpendicular to the scan arm.
1007989 O 227 (322)

Expected results
The end of the collimator screw must not deviate more than 2 mm in any direction.
15.2Test end stop of the scan movement

Preparation
Rotate the C-arm to 180
Figure 173 Test scan movement end stops.
Procedure
1. Manually move the scan beam towards its two end stops, (A) and (B) respectively and
verify that there are no obstacles along the way. E.g. that
a. the detector touches the patient support before the end stop (C)
b. the scan screw mechanics reaches the motor bracket before the end stop. (D)
Perform trouble shooting if step 1 fails.
c. If end stop A fails try to add skims (1008310) behind the tube bracket.
d. If end stop B fails, try first to add skims (1008310) behind the tube bracket
and if necessary move the motor bracket according to chapter 20.6.1.
1007989 O 228 (322)

15.3Verify function of scan movement read head

Preparation
Procedure
1. Move the scan movement mechanics back and forth. Check that the green LED (A) of
the readhead is lit throughout the whole movement.
See trouble shooting (chapter 20.6.2) if the test fails.
Figure 174 Verify function of scan movement read head.
1007989 O 229 (322)

15.4Test scan speed

Preparation
C-arm in 0.
Procedure
1. Start the Service Tool.
Choose the tab Service and click on Measurements.
Click on Scan speed.
Click Yes (in order to perform a new scan).
Choose min scan speed.
Note the values of deviation, overshoot and max speed variation fast/slow (A in Figure 175)
respectively and compare the values with the reference values (B in Figure 175).
Tip: Use the table in Figure 176 for logging and evaluating values.
Click OK to close the window and Cancel (i.e. not saving results) to return to the tab
Measurements.
Repeat step 3-7 for max scan speed.
Repeat step 3-8 for the C-arm in -90 and +90.
Figure 175 Test of scan speed.
1007989 O 230 (322)

Figure 176 Example of table for logging and evaluating values.
Outgoing Control
The values must not exceed the reference values, see (B) in Figure 175.
If the scan speed test fails, check motor currents according to chapter 15.4.1.
If the currents are too high it might indicate:
That there is dirt on the screw. If so clean the screw.
That the detector unit touches the patient support.
That the scan movement parts are not mounted properly.
15.4.1 Plot motor currents during movement

This chapter describes how to plot motor currents during movement for the collimator motor,
scan motor and compression motor.
Always use absolute values on all motor current measurements!

Notice (SCS Calibration Tool shows positive or negative values depending on the
direction of the measured movement.)
15.4.2 Collimator motor

Procedure
Perform motor current measurements for the collimator movement motor by applying the
following parameters to sections 15.4.5, 15.4.6 and 15.4.7 respectively.
Motor: collimator
New position: 2300 (to move the collimator down) Speed: 1000
New position: 27 (to move the collimator back to home position) Speed: 1000
Perform one plot/measurement for down and up with the C-arm in 0 and +90 respectively.
Outgoing control
Max 1.7 A when moving the collimator up from patient support (i.e. 2300 => 27) in 0.
Max 1.5 A when moving the collimator towards patient support (i.e. 27=>2300) in 90.
1007989 O 231 (322)

15.4.3 Scan motor

Procedure
Perform motor current measurements for the scan movement motor by applying the following
parameters to sections 15.4.5, 15.4.6 and 15.4.7 respectively.
Motor: scan
New position: 300 (to move the scan mechanics to the left end position) Speed:
60000
New position: 274000 (scan mechanics to the right end position) Speed: 60000
New position: 300 (to move the collimator back to left end position) Speed: 60000
Perform one plot/measurement with the c-arm in 0 and +90 respectively.
Outgoing control
Continuous motor current during movement: 4.5 A or less. Must never exceed 5.5 A.
15.4.4 Compression motor

Procedure
Perform motor current measurements for the compression movement motor by applying the
following parameters to sections 15.4.5, 15.4.6 and 15.4.7 respectively.
Motor: compression
New position: 1480 (to move compression mechanics to up) Speed: 500
New position: 100 (Compression mechanics to lowest position) Speed: 500
New position: 1480 (compression mechanics back to home position) Speed: 500)
Perform one plot/measurement with the C-arm in 0.
Outgoing control
Continuous motor current during movement: 2 A or less. Must never exceed 3.1 A.
1007989 O 232 (322)

15.4.5 Position the motor before plotting motor current
Figure 177 Position the motor before plotting motor current.
Procedure
1. Choose the tab Runtime in the SCS Calibration tool.
Select the desired motor to move. See (A) in Figure 177.
Press Goto (B).
Enter the desired new position of the motor. (This will be the starting position when logging
the motor current.)
Enter the desired Speed. (The movement will start immediately after Speed has been entered.)
15.4.6 Start log and choose motor to log

1. Start SCS Calibration tool.
2. Choose Log/ Start Log. See (A) in
Figure 180.
3. Choose the desired motor; Scan or
Collimator (B).
4. Check the Current check-box (C).
5. Click OK.
Figure 178 Start log and choose motor to log.
1007989 O 233 (322)

15.4.7 Perform logged motor movement and view graph
Figure 179 Perform logged motor movements and view graph.
Procedure
6. Choose the Runtime tab in the SCS Calibration tool.
7. Select the desired motor to move (A).
8. Press Goto (B).
9. Enter the desired new position of the motor.
10. Enter the desired Speed. (The movement will start immediately after speed has been
entered.)
11. Choose Stop log (C).
12. Choose View Log Graph(s) (D).
Compare the Graph with the corresponding reference image found in chapter 15.4.8.
1007989 O 234 (322)

15.4.8 Reference plots motor currents
Figure 180 Collimator motor

Collimator moving towards the patient support, i.e. pos 27 => pos 2300.
C-arm angle: 0.
Figure 181 Collimator motor.

Collimator moving up from the patient support, i.e. pos 2300 => pos 27.
C-arm angle: 0.
1007989 O 235 (322)

Figure 182 Scan motor.

Scan movement mechanics moving left to right.
C-arm angle: 0.
Figure 183 Scan motor.

Scan movement mechanics moving right to left.
C-arm angle: 0.
1007989 O 236 (322)

15.5Check idle currents of motors

15.5.1 Idle currents of the collimator movement motor
Procedure
1. Choose the tab Runtime in SCS Calibration Tool and select Collimator motor (A).
2. Reset (B) the current.
3. Click Goto (C). (Enter New position = 27, Speed =1000)
4. Note the current (D) when it has stabilized.
5. Click Reset. (If the value is not reset, choose Settings Reset SCS Normal Mode)
6. Click Goto. (C) (Enter New position = 2300, Speed =1000)
7. Note the current (D) when it has stabilized.
8. Repeat step 3 to 7 two times.
Figure 184 How to check idle-currents of the collimator movement motor.

Table 3 Example of table for evaluating "idle" currents of the collimator motor.
Collimator current (OK/Fail)
Home: < 0.8 A Down: < 0.4 A
C-arm 0 Test #1 * Test #2 * Test #3 *
Home = 27
Down = 2300
* Repetition needed due to fluctuating measurements/values.

1007989 O 237 (322)

15.5.2 Idle currents of the scan movement motor

Procedure
1. Choose the Runtime tab in SCS Calibration Tool and select Scan motor (A).
Reset (B) the current.
Click Goto (C). (Enter New position = 300, Speed =60000)
Note the current (D) when it has stabilized.
Click Reset. (If the value is not reset, choose Settings Reset SCS Normal Mode)
Click Goto (C). (Enter New position = 138750, Speed =60000)
Click Goto. (C) (Enter New position = 274000, Speed =60000)
Repeat step 3 to 10 once.
Figure 185 How to check idle-currents of the scan movement motor.
Table 4 Example of table for evaluating "idle" currents of the scan movement motor.
Scan motor current under 4.5 A (OK/Fail)

Position Test #1 * Position Test #2 *
C-arm 300 138750 274000 300 138750 274000
angle

1007989 O 238 (322)

15.5.3 Idle currents of the compression movement motor

Procedure
1. Choose the Runtime tab in SCS Calibration Tool and select Compression motor (A).
Reset (B) the current.
Click Goto. (C). (Enter New position = 0, Speed =50)
Click Goto. (C) (Enter New position = 1480, Speed =50)
Repeat step 3 to 7 once.
Figure 186 How to check "idle" currents of the compression movement motor.
Table 5 Example of table for evaluating "idle" currents of the scan movement motor
Compression motor current < 2 A (OK/Fail)
Position Test #1 * Position Test #2 *
C-arm angle 0 1480 0 1480
0

1007989 O 239 (322)

15.6Radiation leakage
Tools
Fluorescent paper (1008279)
Procedure
1. Place fluorescent paper on the patient support. Make sure that the piece of paper
partly covers the front of the patient support.
2. Turn off the light in the room.
3. Perform a Still with x-ray exposure from Service Tool and at the same time look at
the fluorescent paper. Check that only the pattern from the collimator slits is visible,
that is, that no radiation except for the primarily radiation down through the X-ray
prevent cover is emitted (see Figure 187).
4. If there are other lit areas or spots, start trouble shooting for radiation leakage.
Figure 187 Fluorescent paper on the patient support, Still with x-ray exposure. No radiation leakage
can be seen, only the pattern from the collimator slits.
Outgoing control
No radiation leakages from the X-ray prevent cover.
1007989 O 240 (322)

16. Backup procedures

16.1Backup Acquisition workstation computer
See AW System administrators guide, ref [2].
16.2Backup HVG firmware

It is not possible to perform any backup of the HVG firmware.
16.3Backup SCS parameters

This section describes the backup procedure before removal of a SCS board.
Figure 188 SCS with JTAG connector and reset button marked.
Procedure
1. Stop the CCS service
2. Start the Calibration tool.
3. Log in with password Mamea.
4. Click on the Parameters tab. (If not already selected.)
5. Make sure that Automatic update is checked.
6. Check that the text "SCS connected." is shown in the lower left corner.
7. Verify that the parameter values are not only zero. (In case of connection problem, try
again from step 1.)
8. Choose Save to file.
9. Give the file a filename that contains the current date, e.g.
SCS_parameters_20071107.txt.
10. Close the SCS Calibration tool.
11. Start the CCS service.
1007989 O 241 (322)

16.4Restore of backup (SCS parameters)

This section describes the backup restore procedure after replacement or reattachment of the
SCS board.
Procedure
3. Click on the Parameters tab (if not already selected).
4. Make sure that Automatic update is checked.
5. Check that the text "SCS connected." is shown in the lower left corner.
6. Select Advance mode in the Settings menu.
7. Choose Load from file...
8. Browse and choose the desired file.
9. In the Events window, check that the correct file has been loaded and that the
parameters have been set and verified.
10. Choose Store permanently.
11. Under Settings, store current calibration for the Load Cell Amplifiers (LCA). Press
Yes when asked to store current calibration.
12. In the Events window, check that the parameters have been stored permanently.
13. Close the SCS Calibration tool.
14. Reset the system by pressing the reset button on the right side of the main cabinet.
1007989 O 242 (322)

17. Installing firmware

This section describes how to install firmware in the IPB, DU, SCS and HVG units. The
firmware installation shall only be performed by a trained service engineer. It is important to
consult the software release information for an overview of the total number of firmware that
has to be done.
17.1Preparing a PC to be used for firmware upgrade

This section describes how to install Xilinx software in a PC. Software that will be used for
firmware upgrade of IPB, DU and SCS.
17.1.1 Required equipment

Windows computer (preferably Windows XP) with USB (preferably USB 2.0) port and
serial port.
1003836 Xilinx iMPACT software. Included in Xilinx WebPACK 8.2i.
1004585 Xilinx Platform Cable USB for firmware upgrade of DU and IPB.
A serial cable, approximately 2 m long. (Not necessary for firmware upgrade but a
good thing to have for trouble-shooting and diagnostics.)
17.1.2 Installing and configuring tools

1. Install Xilinx iMPACT (1003836) on the Windows computer. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Connect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB to a USB port.
Windows will launch the Found New Hardware Wizard. Press Next until the wizard has
installed its software. Press Finish.
This step will be repeated three times. (If you later remove the Xilinx Platform Cable USB
and insert it into another USB port step 3 will be repeated another three times.)
Start iMPACT and press Cancel in the Project dialog that pops up.
Select Output Cable Setup.
Select Platform Cable USB, Max Speed (or 6 MHz whichever us selectable), usb1 (the port
you use) and Local. Press OK.
Close iMPACT.
Install Microchip MPLAB on the Windows computer. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Connect the MPLAB ICD 2 In Circuit Debugger to a USB port.
1007989 O 243 (322)

17.2IPB
17.2.1 Installing IPB firmware
The IPB JTAG1 interface is used to program the IPB firmware into the flash memories
located on IPB. Three flash memories are used for storing IPB firmware.
Figure 189 Flash memories of the IPB.

The first (leftmost) flash memory is programmed with the file
IPB_{major version}_{minor version}_{build number}_A.
The second flash memory is programmed with the file
IPB_{major version}_{minor version}_{build number}_B.
The third flash memory is programmed with the file
IPB_{major version}_{minor version}_{build number}_C.
Preparation
Note the firmware version in case of re-installation of the same firmware.
In case of firmware upgrade, the SCS and HVG units or CCS software may also need
an upgrade. Refer to the software release information for a complete list of the
firmware/software that must be installed at the same time.
Procedure
1. Connect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB to the computer and to the JTAG 1
connector of IPB.
Figure 190 The IPB with JTAG 1 connector marked.

Select File Initialize Chain.
A pop-up that says that 4 devices were detected in the boundary-scan chain shall appear.
Press OK.
Four devices shall be visible in the iMPACT window. The first / leftmost device, (an
xcf04s Flash memory) shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration
File window appears.
Go to the folder containing the IPB firmware you are upgrading to.
Note the version number of the IPB firmware in the Serial and article number record of
the system. Update Service history record.
1007989 O 244 (322)

Select the IPB_*_A.mcs file. (E.g. IPB_0_4_3_A.mcs) and press Open.

The second device shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File
window appears.
Select the IPB_*_B.mcs file. (E.g. IPB_0_4_3_B.mcs) and press Open.
The third device shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File
window appears.
Select the IPB_*_C.mcs file. (E.g. IPB_0_4_3_C.mcs) and press Open.
The fourth device (an xc2vp30 FPGA) shall be marked in green and an Assign New
Configuration File window appears. Press Cancel.
Right-click on the first device and select Program from the drop-down menu that
appears.
Make sure Erase Before Programming and Verify are selected and press OK.
Wait while the programming is performed and verify that Programming Succeeded is
displayed afterwards.
Repeat steps 14 16 for the other two Flash devices you have assigned files to.
Disconnect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB from the JTAG 1 connector of IPB.
The new firmware is now loaded into Flash memory on IPB. To make IPB use the new
firmware switch off the modality and switch it on. You can do this immediately or
perform other updates directly and switch the modality off and on later.
Outgoing control
Perform a Daily Quality Control, according to Quality Control Procedures [1].
17.3DU Detector unit

17.3.1 Installing DU firmware
The DU JTAG interface is used to program the DU firmware into the flash memories located
on DB. Two flash memories are used for storing DB firmware and one for LB firmware. All
LB:s load the same firmware from the flash memory on DB.
Figure 191 Flash memories of the DU.

The first (leftmost) flash memory is programmed with the file
DB_{major version}_{minor version}_{build number}_A.
The second flash memory is programmed with DB_{major version}_{minor
version}_{build number}_B.
The third flash memory is programmed with LB_{major version}_{minor
version}_{build number}_C.
1007989 O 245 (322)

Preparation
In order to access the JTAG connector of the DU, the left C-arm cover must be
removed as described in section 8.6.
In case of firmware upgrade, the SCS and HVG units or CCS software may also need
an upgrade. Refer to the software release information for a complete list of the
firmware/software that must be installed at the same time.
Procedure
1. Connect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB to the computer and to the JTAG
connector of the DU.
Figure 192 JTAG connector of the Detector unit.

A pop-up that says that 4 devices were detected in the boundary-scan chain shall appear. Press
OK.
Four devices shall be visible in the iMPACT window. The first / leftmost device, (an xcf04s
Flash memory) shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File window
appears.
Go to the folder containing the DU firmware you are upgrading to.
Note the version number of the DU firmware in the Serial and article number record of the
system. Update Service history record.
Select the DB_*_A.mcs file. (E.g. DB_2_2_1_A.mcs) and press Open.
The second device shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File window
appears.
Select the DB_*_B.mcs file. (E.g. DB_2_2_1_B.mcs) and press Open.
The third device shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File window
appears.
Select the LB_*_C.mcs file. (E.g. LB_2_3_1_C.mcs) and press Open.
The fourth device (an xc2vp7 FPGA) shall be marked in green and an Assign New
Configuration File window appears. Press Cancel.
Right-click on the first device and select Program... from the drop-down menu that appears.
1007989 O 246 (322)

Repeat steps 14 16 for the other two Flash devices you have assigned files to.
Disconnect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB from the JTAG connector of DU.
The new firmware is now loaded into Flash memory on DU. To make DU use the new
firmware switch off the modality and switch it on. You can do this immediately or
perform other updates directly and switch the modality off and on later.
Outgoing control
Perform a Daily Quality Control, according to ref [1], Quality Control Procedures.
17.4SCS
17.4.1 Installing SCS firmware
Preparation
In case of firmware upgrade, the IPB and HVG units may also need an upgrade. Refer
to the software release information for a total list of the firmware that must be installed
at the same time.
Perform backup of the SCS parameters. See section 16.3.
To avoid problems with a bug in the Xilinx Virtex-4 circuit (FPGA) on the
SCS board, the second flash memory (device #2) must always be
Notice
programmed before the first flash memory (device #1) is programmed, see
step 11 and step 14 in the following Procedure.
Procedure
1. Connect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB to the computer and to the JTAG
connector of SCS. See A Figure 193.
Figure 193 SCS with (A) JTAG connector and (B) reset button marked.
1007989 O 247 (322)


A pop-up that says that three devices were detected in the boundary-scan chain shall
appear. Press OK.
Three devices shall be visible in the iMPACT window.
The first / leftmost device (an xcf04s Flash memory) shall be marked in green and an Assign
New Configuration File window shall appear.
Go to the folder containing the SCS firmware you are upgrading to, select the SCS_*_A.mcs
file. (e. g. SCS_30.15.12_A.mcs) and press Open.
The second device shall be marked in green and an Assign New Configuration File window
shall appear.
Go to the folder containing the SCS firmware you are upgrading to, select the SCS_*_B.mcs
file (e.g. SCS_30.15.12_B.mcs) and press Open.
The third device shall be marked in green and when the Assign New Configuration File
window appears, press Cancel.
Right-click on the second/middle device and select Program... from the drop-down menu that
appears.
Right-click on the first/left device and select Program from the drop-down menu that
appears.
Disconnect the Xilinx Platform Cable USB from the JTAG connector of SCS.
The new firmware is now loaded into Flash memory on SCS.
Push and hold the reset button on the SCS unit for 2s (until the stand resets). See B Figure
193.
Restore the SCS parameters, see section 16.4.
17.4.2 Test and calibrations after installing SCS firmware

Check that the correct firmware version has been installed. Follow instructions delivered with
the firmware release.
17.5HVG
17.5.1 Required equipment
1 computer with Windows (preferably Windows XP) and usb-port (if using a laptop it
should be connected to power to prevent it from shutting off during programming)
1 Spellman HVG Programming Kit (programming cable, usb-RS485 converter and
power adaptor)
Extension cord for powering the programming cable and computer (if the generator is
not very near a power outlet)
1 flashlight
1007989 O 248 (322)

1 non-conductive thin object, e.g. a mechanical pencil made of plastic, a small plastic
screwdriver or a small Allen key with tape on
Software: Spellman Mamea GUI (USB version)
Software: Spellman Firmware Upload GUI (USB version)
Software: Installation CD for the usb-RS485 converter
Software: DSP and/or FPGA firmware file for update (DSP-file starts always with M
e.g. M0045005.S2 and FPGA-file starts with P e.g. P0009009.S2).
17.5.2 Installing the firmware

Preparation
Check that the generator to be upgraded is of type 1003100 B (Rev: N or higher is
written on the front of the generator). These are the generators that work with
RAD70B-tubes.
If the usb-RS485 converter is used for the first time together with the computer it has to
be installed. This needs to be done before attaching the usb-connector to the computer:
1. Put in the small CD in the CD-drive of the computer. The program should auto
start.
2. Click on link to driver for Windows Vista, 2003, XP, 2000. A program
should start and install the driver. (A step by step instruction on how to do this
is included on the CD but it doesnt seem to reflect the course of events
perfectly on all computers. It is possible that the program is installed without a
confirmation is received).
Make sure that the Mamea GUI and Firmware Upload GUI works on the computer that
will be used for upgrading and that the files to be uploaded can be reached from the
computer.
In case of firmware upgrade, other parts in the system (the IPB, SCS, SW package etc.)
may also need an upgrade. Refer to the software release information for a total list of
the firmware that must be installed at the same time.
Check firmware version of the HVG:
1. Start the AWS application on the AW computer and log in.
2. Go to Help menu and select About.
3. HVG firmware versions (DSP and FPGA) can be found under System Details.
4. Note the firmware version prior upgrade.
It can be chosen to program only DSP, only FPGA or both but when
programming both the generator have to be restarted in between
according to the following procedure. Note that the generator
Caution!
settings HAS TO BE RESTORED after any programming as
described in section 17.5.3. Neglecting to do this before connecting
the generator back to the system can burn the filament on the tube!
1007989 O 249 (322)

Procedure
1. Switch off F1 and F12 in the side cabinet (three phase main and auxiliary power to
the HVG).
Figure 194 Orange light indicating high voltage in generator.

2. Wait 5 min until the orange light goes out, see Figure 194. Also check that the LEDs
on the generator, see Figure 198, are not shining.
3. Connect the usb-side of the programming cable to the computer and check which
COM-number it is given by going into Start menu/Settings/Control
Panel/System/Hardware/Device Manager/Ports (COM &LPT). The device is
probably called USB Serial Port or similar. The COM-number for the device needs
to be set in the Mamea GUI and Firmware upload GUI later.
The COM-number needs to be lower than 16 in order to work with the

Notice GUI:s. If the USB Serial Port is given a higher COM-number it has to
be changed to a lower one by going in to Port Settings/Advanced.
4. Connect the programming cable to the HVG. On L30 this is easiest done by removing
1007160 Cable communication SCS-HVG from the SCS K2:HVG (if needed the
SCS K2:AWP can be temporarily removed to easier reach the SCS-HVG cable).
Connect the programming cable to the HVG-SCS cable, see Figure 195.
Figure 195 Connecting the programming cable to SCS-HVG cable on L30.
If you are using a laptop it should be connected to power in order to

Notice
ensure that it is not shut off during programming
Connect the power adaptor (5 VDC) to a power outlet, 230 VAC main.
Switch on the single phase power to the generator.
1007989 O 250 (322)

Check that the connection works and that it is possible to read out parameters by following
the next few steps. Start the Mamea GUI. Choose the COM-port found in step 3 above.
The Mamea GUI can be used to change vital parameters in the

Caution!
generator. Do not do anything else than instructed in this manual
Open the Help menu and click Version. Check the firmware version. It should be the same as
in the preparation step.
Click the Configure Filament Stand By-button in the upper left, see Figure 196.
Figure 196 Mamea GUI, main window. Configure Filament Stand by marked in the upper
left.
Click on Get standby status, see Figure 197. You should read 2 A and Filament Standby is
ON.
Figure 197 Mamea GUI, after pressing Configure Filament Stand by. Get Standby Status is
marked
Close the Mamea GUI.
1007989 O 251 (322)

Switch off the single phase power to the generator (fuse F12).
Set SW1:1 in the generator to Open (programming mode) see Figure 198 and Figure 199
b.
Figure 198 LED and SW1 on the HVG. SW1 can be reached through the hole with the
LEDs
Figure 199 SW1 settings in different modes. SW1:8 are open or closed depending on X-ray
tube (open for RAD70B and closed for RAD70).
Switch on the single phase power to the generator, (fuse F12).
Start the Firmware Upload GUI (USB version) and make sure that the correct COM-port is
chosen; this can be done either in the Port setting in the GUI or by changing the first number
in the Commcfg-file next to the GUI-file with was created the first time you choose settings
for the GUI on your computer.
The other settings should be as according to Figure 200. Click Save after altering the settings.
You should now see the main window of the GUI according to Figure 201. The Altera FPGA
and TI DSP buttons are disabled out at this point.
Click Load File to choose firmware file.
For programming the FPGA, select the file with name starting with a P e.g. P0009009.S2
and click Open. A popup confirming that the file has been loaded into the application properly
appears, click OK.
When returning to the Firmware Upload GUI the Altera FPGA button is activated. Click on it
and confirm with Yes to start the programming.
1007989 O 252 (322)

Make sure that the computer does not go into any kind of sleep or energy
Notice
saving mode during the programming.
Check that all the LEDs on the HVG are lit during the programming. If they are not lit
during the programming, the device is not properly programmed and the procedure
has to be re-done.
If the LEDs are not lit during FPGA-programming, please check that
correct COM-port is set and that all cables are connected correctly! Do
Notice
not shut of the generator! The LEDs should go out when the programming
has been completed.
Wait until the programming is complete

before moving on to the next step,
programming of the FPGA takes about
10 min. If the programming hang-up or
does not work, do not shut off the
power to the HVG, instead try again
from step 15 and check the connectors
and COM-port.
When the programming is completed the
progress window will close. A confirmation of
that the programming was ok will appear, click
OK.
Check that the HVG LEDs are back to normal.
Close the Firmware Upload GUI by clicking on
the X in the upper right corner.
Switch off the single phase power to the
generator (fuse F12).
Set SW1:1 in the generator to Closed, see
Figure 198 and Figure 199 a.
Now the firmware has to be read from one
memory to another inside the generator. This is Figure 200 Settings for the Firmware GUI.
COM-port should be set according
done by switching on the single phase power to to step 3.
the generator (fuse F12) for 20 seconds. Then
switch it off again. (If only FPGA was to be programmed you can now move on to restoring
the parameters according to chapter 17.5.3).
Set SW1:1 in the generator to Open (programming mode), see Figure 198 and Figure 199 b.
Switch on the single phase power to the generator (fuse F12).
1007989 O 253 (322)

Start the Firmware Upload GUI. Check in the

lower left corner of the main window (Figure
201) that the correct COM-port is still chosen.
Click Load File to choose firmware file.
Browse to the folder containing the firmware
to be installed.
Select the file with name starting with an M
e.g. M00450005.S2 and click Open. A
popup confirming that the file has been loaded
into the application properly appears, click
OK.
When returning to the Firmware Upload GUI
the TI DSP button is activated. Click on it and
confirm with Yes to start the programming. Figure 201 Firmware Upload GUI main window.
It takes about one minute for the DSP to clear its memory before programming starts. When
programming the DSP, the LEDs continue to look normal (big and small green LED shining
and one small red LED blinking, compared to FPGA where all LEDs shine). Wait until the
programming is complete and a window with Programming OK appears before moving on
to the next step.
If the programming hang-up or doesnt work, do not shut off the

power to the HVG! If the power is shut off during a DSP-
Caution! programming the generator is much likely to hang up and then
needs to be EXCHANGED! If problem with the programming arise,
check the connectors and try again from 30.
When the programming is completed and the progress window has closed. Click on the OK
button on the confirmation that programming is OK. Close the Firmware Upload GUI by
clicking on the X in the upper right corner.
Switch off the single phase power to the generator (fuse F12).
Set SW1:1 in the generator to Closed.
Also this firmware has to be transferred inside the generator. Switch on the single phase
power to the generator (fuse F12) and leave it on for 20 seconds, then switch it off again.
Now the generator settings have to be restored according to

Caution! instructions below. If the generator is connected back to the system
in this state there is a risk that the filament of the tube gets burnt off.
1007989 O 254 (322)

17.5.3 Restoring the HVG settings

To ensure that the correct configuration is loaded into the HVG the settings have to be
restored after a reprogramming or at times when the settings have been corrupted. Follow the
instructions below:
1. If not already switched off, switch off the power to the generator (fuses F1 and F12 in
the side cabinet).
Set SW1:2 on the HVG to Open (restore mode), see Figure 198 and Figure 199 b.
Switch on the single phase power to the generator (fuse F12) and wait 10 seconds, the switch
it off again.
Set SW1:2 to Closed.
Perform if procedure done directly after a reprogramming: Switch on the single phase power
to the generator (fuse F12).
Perform if procedure done directly after a reprogramming: Start the Mamea GUI and check
version and Filament standby current as described above. Do NOT proceed to the next step
if the version isnt the one that was programmed or if the Filament standby current is
something else than 2 A.
Perform if procedure done directly after a reprogramming: Switch off the power to the
generator (fuse F12) and remove the programming cable. Reconnect the generator to the
system.
Switch on the power to the generator (fuses F1 and F12).
Reset the stand. If you have done a reprogramming of the generator please check in the AWS
that the correct firmware is shown also there.
Uncheck the Brake anode setting in the Tools menu on the AW to limit the strain on the high
speed starter and anode assembly. Make three exposures (with different mAs) on the five
different used kV, totally 15 exposures. Change the Brake anode setting back to normal.
Compression Done.
Perform if the procedure done directly after a reprogramming: Perform a Full calibration, see
Quality control procedures [1].
Perform if the procedure done directly after a reprogramming: According to Quality control
procedures [1], check:
Tube output
Tube Voltage
Perform a Daily Quality Control. If this looks OK, the system is ready to use.
1007989 O 255 (322)

17.5.4 Configure tube type in HVG

Preparations
Determine the item number on the X-ray tube
Procedure
1. Switch off fuses F1 and F12.
Configure SW1 (see Figure 198 and Figure 199 b.) depending on the X-ray tube type:
If the tube is of RAD70-type: Set SW1:8 to Closed.
If the tube is of RAD70B-type (spare part no 1012515): Set SW1:8 to Open.
Set SW1:2 to Open, Restore mode (see Figure 199c).
Switch on fuse F12 and wait 10 seconds.
Switch off fuse F12.
Set SW1:2 to Closed, Normal mode.
Switch on fuses F1 and F12.
Note X-ray tubes item and serial number and the switch setting in the modalitys Service
history record.
1007989 O 256 (322)

18. Image artefacts

The main purpose with this chapter is to give an overview of what kind of image artefacts that
may appear and how they should be handled. Some of these image artefacts are more or less
normal and do emerge from time to time. These artefacts can most often be handled with
different calibration procedures. Other artefacts are more severe and should not appear. These
may require more complicated solutions.
The outline of this chapter:
1. Brief description of the Philipss detector system.
Different types of calibration. (What they do, when and how they should be performed)
Descriptions and examples of various types of artefacts, with suggested solutions.
In-depth description of the channel mask and guidelines describing how to perform manual
masking.
18.1Detector Properties Related to Image Quality

Philipss X-ray detector is a multi-slit scanning system which consists of 132 slits distributed
over 21 lines. Due to the scanning movement, each slit contributes to the full image. As a
result, overlapping images, with up to 18 times redundancy are produced. The gaps between
the slits are distributed so that there are no areas of reduced redundancy.
Figure 202 Philipss X-ray detector.
1007989 O 257 (322)

18.2Natural image artefacts

Natural artefacts are the ones that can easily be eliminated with the help of calibration. They
might appear from time to time and there is no reason to be alarmed; product support does not
have to be contacted, unless the artefacts start to appear more frequently. Note that if these
artefacts reoccur at the same location, the channel(s) causing them should be disabled
manually (see section 18.6).
18.2.1 Lines Instable

channels
Description
This type of artefact exists due to
channel instabilities. A channel
simply stops working after
passing calibrations. The artefacts
look like a line, light or dark, and
always occur along the scan
direction.
Solution
A quick calibration, which
identifies and disables instable
channels, should eliminate these
artefacts.
Figure 203 Lines due to instable channels.
18.3Severe image artefacts

These types of artefacts are more severe and can often not be eliminated by calibrations. The
defects can for instance appear due to dead areas of the detector or broken components.
Always create a help desk errand and report these problems to product support.
18.3.1 Loss of X-ray output

Description
If X-ray output for some reason is lost during a
scan, an image like the one to the right may be the
result. This could be due to an arc event, a broken
filament in the X-ray tube or an internal HVG
error. Occasional loss of X-ray output is
unfortunately something that cannot be completely
avoided.
Solution
Figure 204 Loss of X-ray output.
Investigate the log-files to see what has occurred.
Check all connections and/or replace the broken
1007989 O 258 (322)

part. Reset the stand and acquire a test image.
18.3.2 Ripple
Description
This type of artefact appears when the surface of the
rotating anode contains some kind of unevenness. Due to
the rotation of the anode, the image will contain some
kind of pattern depending on the severity of the
unevenness. The artefact is intermittent and more often
visible for quick scans and in the back of the images.
Solution
If the software version is below 8.1 P2 the system should
be upgraded. If the ripple is disturbing in normal images,
the X-ray tube needs to be replaced. Figure 205 Close-up of ripple
artefact. (Scan
See also section 11.4.1 for instructions on how to direction left-right.)
perform a ripple test in order to detect and estimate the
severity of ripple.
18.3.3 Detector burst

Description
This type of artefact appears when a sensor incorrectly
indicates X-ray radiation.
Solution
Perform Quick calibration to mask the sensor. (The masking
performed by the Quick Calibration will be removed upon
next Full Calibration.) If the problem remains, manual Figure 206 Detector burst.
masking need to be performed, see section 18.6. (Scan direction
top-town.)
18.3.4 Unstable X-ray output
Description
This type of artefact can appear when the
preheat time is set too short or if the tube
or generator have regulation problems. It
can also appear because of uneven scan
speed or mechanical problems.
Solution
Check the preheat time settings.
Check Scan speed.
Check mechanical parts involved in
scan motion.
Figure 207 Unstable X-ray output. (Scan direction

left-right.)
1007989 O 259 (322)

18.4Miscellaneous image artefacts

Gathered here are more seldom seen phenomenon, usually they are due to human errors or
isolated events.
18.4.1 Loose objects in the collimator

Description
It has happened that objects, for
instance screws, have loosened over
time and fallen down into the
collimator. Images like the one to the
right can then be the result.
Solution
Lift up X-ray prevent cover according
to section 8.1 in order to see if any
loose objects are visible inside the
collimator. If so, remove the object(s),
otherwise contact product support.
Figure 208 Loose objects in the collimator.
18.4.2 White dots

Description
White dots are seen at the same location in all
images. They occur due to tiny objects, e.g.
metal fragments, being located somewhere
between the X-ray tube and the detector.
Solution
Wipe clean the patient support, the compression
paddle and the phantom (if used). If the dots
remain, there could be something stuck in one
of the above mentioned parts. Remove one part
at a time and make exposures to locate the
defect. Please contact product support.
Figure 209 White dots due to tiny objects

somewhere between the X-ray
tube and the detector.
1007989 O 260 (322)

18.4.3 Unsharpness artefacts / motion blur

Description
If a patient moves during an exam, or the scan motion is not linear, images can appear
unsharp, i.e. motion blurring effects can be seen. For instance, the stair-case artefact seen in
Figure 210 a) is due to patient movement. The image seen in Figure 210 b) could be due to
the same reason; but could also have other explanations, e.g. a broken scan screw.
Solution
If the phenomenon is seen over the entire image and in all images the blurriness is probably
not due to patients moving. Instead, check for strange sounds or and/or abnormal scan arm
movement in trying to locate the problem. Moreover, contact product support.
Figure 210 Unsharpness artefacts (a) and motion blur (b).
18.5Guidelines Image quality problems

Investigating image quality problems is not always a straightforward task. However there are
some guidelines that can help to identify the cause, some of these are summarized below.
See section 11.8 for more information about the channel mask.
Ask yourself these questions:
Where is the problem located?
Does it appear in every image?
Does any calibration help? Which?
Also, when reporting an image quality problem try to remember the following:
Get as much information about the problem as possible, e.g. answer the questions
above.
Attach examples of the artefact (often screenshots will do).
Create a backup file of the channel mask by clicking on Backup CCS Mask to File
under Tools Channel mask viewer in the Service Tool. See section 11.8. Attach the
created file (ChannelMask.Array2D) with the report.
1007989 O 261 (322)

Explain what type of troubleshooting that has been done so far.

Attach the CCS and service tool log files.
18.6Manual masking
Line artefacts that reoccur several times in the same place indicate instable detector parts that
should be masked permanently. There are three ways to accomplish this: entering the instable
ASICs in CCS local configuration or masking via the Raw data viewer.
18.6.1 Manual masking using the Raw Data Viewer

Manual masking has to be performed if the system has not been able to calibrate/disable
channels by running Quick calibration and Full calibration. The only way to mask channels
permanently is to use the Raw Data Viewer, see Figure 212.
The Raw Data Viewer is accessed by

1. Choose View latest image in the Service Tool.
Choose To Raw Data Viewer from point in the drop down menu in Figure 211 below.
Click in the image.
Figure 211 Accessing the Raw Data Viewer with the latest image.
The normal procedure of masking channels in the Raw Data Viewer is to scroll through the
image line by line, see 6 in Figure 212. Areas are masked/unmasked by clicking and
dragging with the mouse.
Manually masked areas are marked dark red, see 3. Areas that have been automatically
masked by Quick Calibration are marked light red, see 4.
The latter ones can serve as a help when finding and permanently masking problem areas.
1007989 O 262 (322)

Figure 212 Masking channels using the Raw Data Viewer.
1. Sets the function of the left mouse Check box for showing masked channels.
button.
Check box for showing the background
Area in the image (black) where the image (i.e. the composite image). Would
chosen line does not provide image data. appear in the area marked 2 in the figure
above when activated.
Manually masked image area (dark red)
for the chosen line. Button for rebuilding the image in order to
preview the result of masking/unmasking
Automatically masked image area (light
channels.
red) for the chosen line.
Save the image mask in order to be used
The magnification of the image window.
for future image acquisitions.
Chosen line (0-20) or Image (i.e. the
Close the Raw Data Viewer without
composite image).
changing the channel mask.
Function of left mouse button
Channel Information = Information about channel and ASIC is shown when clicking in
the image
Mask Channels = Channel masked when clicking and dragging in the image
Unmask Channels = Channel unmasked when clicking and dragging in the image
After masking and unmasking in the raw data viewer, an AEC calibration
Notice
has to be performed.
1007989 O 263 (322)

19. Sectra Monitoring

If Sectra Monitoring is used, the following parameters are monitored with action limits,
critical limits and system error limits are specified where applicable. Warning and critical
limits are defined by the Sectra Monitoring configuration while the system error limits are
defined by the system and will cause emergency stop. Warnings are indicated by yellow and
critical issues are red in the Sectra Monitoring web interface.
Name Warning Critical Error Comment

CPU Usage 70% 90% CPU usage. If the CPU usage is
constantly high, a process might have to
be killed.
Filesystem C 80% 95% Memory usage on system disk. If high,
consider deleting temporary files.
Filesystem D 80% 95% Memory usage on storage disk. If high,
consider switching to larger disks.
SW/FW N/A N/A N/A Various SW/FW versions are monitored.
versions
Bias voltage 130 V N/A 120 V Bias voltage of the detector. Low bias
voltage indicates that there might be a
shortcut in the detector.
Collimator N/A RMS of collimator motor current when
current 1 collimator moves to scan position.
Collimator N/A RMS of collimator motor current during
current 2 scan.
Collimator N/A RMS of collimator motor current when
current 3 collimator moves to home position.
Collimator 40 pulses N/A Collimator movement during scan. Check
movement the collimator mechanics. The CCS will
receive a notice message when over 41
pulses.
Filament 0 or 1 N/A Indicates if first (0) or second (1) filament
is used.
Filament 1 20000 N/A Number of exposures for the first filament
exposures of the x-ray tube. Prepare to change x-ray
tube/change filament if above the limit.
Filament 2 35000 N/A Number of exposures for the second
exposures filament of the x-ray tube. Prepare to
change x-ray tube/change filament if
above the limit.
Frequency of 0.2 N/A Frequency during last week of
exams with examinations with tube cooling times
irritating waiting above 45 s between exposures. Check
time tube output if above limit.
Local left/right 2 N/A 1 The channel mask overlap for local
edge overlap left/right edge. Keep an eye on the
system if below limit.
Masked 5.0% N/A Amount of masked channels. Check the
channels system if above limit.
Max LB temp 45C N/A 50C Temperature of the warmest line board. If
above limit, check the DU cooler.
1007989 O 264 (322)


Max waiting 90 s N/A Maximum tube cooling time between
time inside exposures of exams during last week. A
exam waiting time of above 90 seconds is
highly exceptional.
Mean N/A Mean compression height during last
compression week. No warning limit specified. If the
height mean irritating waiting time is large, and
at the same time the mean compression
height is much larger than before, no
action might be needed. It is then likely
that unusually dense breasts were
examined last week.
Mean dose N/A Mean dose in mGy during last week.
Mean irritating 1.8 s N/A The amount of waiting time for tube
waiting cooling inside an examination that
time/exam exceeds 45 s is called irritating waiting
time. The mean value during last week is
monitored. If above limit, check tube
output. Also, keep an eye on
compression height irregularities (see
above).
Number of 5 N/A Number of resets last week. Keep an eye
resets this week on the system if above limit.
Ripple 1.5% N/A Amount of ripple in the front and back of
front/back the image. If above limit, consider
replacing the tube.
Roi left/right 3.5 N/A 3 The channel mask overlap for roi left/right
edge overlap edge. Keep an eye on the system if
below limit.
SCS 5V status 1 N/A Status of the 5V input to the SCS. This is
either 1 (good) or 0 (bad). Replace SCS
board if under limit.
Stand N/A Total number of exposures made with
exposures this system.
Tube exposures N/A Total number of exposures with this tube.
Tube output 0.11 N/A 0.10 Tube output at 32 kV during last
mGy/mAs mGy/ calibration. Prepare to replace tube if
mAs below limit.
Week N/A Number of examinations made last week.
examinations
Week N/A Number of normal exposure last week.
exposures
Week N/A Number of AEC exposure last week.
exposures AEC
Collision C-arm 3 N/A Number of C-arm collisions for rotation
rotation motion in last CCS log file. Keep an eye
on the system if above limit.
Comp paddle 3 N/A Number of times the exposure differed
incorrectly too much from the expected (message to
indicated user to check compression paddle and
Normal/Implant selection) in last CCS log
file. Consider investigating how the
customer works with compression
paddles. Education may be needed.
1007989 O 265 (322)


General contact 2 N/A Number of error messages with action
support error code 4 (contact support), in last CCS log
file. Be prepared that the customer will
need help.
General reset 10 N/A Number of error messages with action
error code 2 (reset), in last CCS log file. Keep
an eye on the system.
Modality Reset 3 N/A Number of resets in last log file. Keep an
eye on the system if above limit.
Oil cooler flow 3 N/A Number of messages about low flow in
low the oil cooler. Keep an eye on the system
if above limit.
Overcurrent 3 N/A Number of messages about high current
collimator in collimator motor. Check the collimator
mechanics.
Potentiometer 3 N/A Number of messages about difference
diff C-height between potentiometer and encoder for
C-height. Consider replacing the
potentiometer.
Potentiometer 3 N/A Number of messages about difference
diff C-rot between potentiometer and encoder for
C-rotation. Consider replacing the
potentiometer.
Tube Arc 3 N/A Number of tube arcs. Keep an eye on the
x-ray system.
Memory Usage 95% 99% Amount of memory used. Check
processes on AW if constantly high.
The file C:\Program Files\Sectra\LogExtractor\Extracted\Zip\Extracted_nnnnnn-

10_yymmdd.zip is downloaded by Sectra Monitoring to \\sm-mamea-
1.microdose.se\agent_upload_readonly. These files contain more extensive information
allowing for deeper analysis.
1007989 O 266 (322)

20. Troubleshooting
20.1X-ray stability test (Ripple test)
A ripple measurement is performed by both using the Service Tool and visually study images
in detail. See chapter 11.4.1.
20.2Communication errors
See section 11.4.5 on page 110 for information about communication errors.
20.3Failed calibrations
The result of calibrations can be found in the file
/ServiceTool/log/CalibrationLog.txt or by clicking on ST Log under the tab
Normal in the Service Tool.
Figure 213 Access to the ST Log via the GUI of the Service Tool.
Example:
-----------------------------------------------------
Wed Oct 24 14:00:28 2007: Geometry calibration failed
-----------------------------------------------------
Scan geometry error before calibration = 25.04um
hs = 673.926mm
zs = -138.424mm gamma = 0.000867062radians
Scan geometry error = 41.9343um (<= 30um) FAIL!
Scan start = 7584um (>= 0um)
Scan stop = 268000um (<= 276000um)
Text in parenthesis shows the required result. The calibration will fail if the result of the
calibration does not meet the requirements.
The calibration in the example above failed due to insufficient precision in scan geometry.
1007989 O 267 (322)

20.3.1 Automatic collimator alignment

Here is listed a number of problems that can arise during collimator alignment, and their
solutions.
Unable to get a It may happen the ACA is unable to find a proper starting point. The
proper starting message The performed scan does not provide enough information...
point may appear. The overview picture may be mostly red (see picture below
or even completely white.
The reason for this is that the starting point of the ACA movement is not
far enough out to the left. This problem can be solved by applying
washers (0.5 mm 1 mm) between the lower part of the ACA mechanics
and the collimator base according to the pictures.
This will shift the motion of the collimator to the left. (It also has effect to
minimize the play of the motor drive, but this is less efficient.) Note that
temporary loss of power to the ACA means that the alignment process
needs to be restarted, so that the motor homing process is started once
again. Loss of power could otherwise lead to a behaviour similar to the
one described here.
Turning the It may happen that turning the knobs does not move the collimator in the
knobs does not expected way. If this is the case, make sure that the springs behind the
have any effect knobs are able to apply force at all desirable knob positions. Adjust the
nuts behind the springs if necessary. If the springs do not apply any force,
the effect of turning the knobs will be highly unpredictable.
1007989 O 268 (322)

Problems It may happen during the first or last (fixation) step that even though the
during last or pictures appears to be normal, it is still impossible to adjust the collimator
first step: bad to a position that is accepted. This can happen if the detector has a
margin geometrical deformation or if a sensor is not properly aligned under the
slit of the post-collimator. If the left/right margin during the first steps is
close to default limit 70 m (below 80 m, say) it is likely that you will
run into problems when trying to fix the collimator with margin above 70
m. In this case, make a local configuration of the Service Tool: (1) Close
the Service Tool. (2) Place the ACAReducedLRMargin.def in :\Program
Files\Sectra\ServiceTool\local_config. The file shall have the following
content:
AutoCollimAlign {
DataAnalyzer {
limitMarginLR = 40
}
}
(3) Start the Service Tool and run Collimator alignment. When the
alignment is completed, check with Verify Alignment that the left/right
margin is above 0 m in 90 and 90, with the x-ray cover mounted. If
the margin is below 0 m, please contact product support.
20.4Explanation of LEDs on the SCS unit
Figure 214 Explanation of LEDS and push buttons on the SCS unit.
1007989 O 269 (322)

20.4.1 LEDs
On top of the SCS unit there are 15 LEDs. All motor-drivers have a diagnosis LED and if the
voltage supplying a motor is below 21V, the LED lights up to indicate Error, i.e. red light.
This might also be used to locate blown fuses.
There is also a diagnosis signal to indicate that the 24V is off, this will be used during upstart
to test that the emergency stop works properly.
LED # Description Indication
1 Z-OFF
2 C-ROT OFF Diagnostics LEDs.
3 AUX OFF Green light = voltage ok
4 Collimator OFF Red light = blown fuse or voltage below 21 V
(e.g. in emergency stop)
5 Scan OFF
6 Compression OFF
7 3,3 V Green light = voltage ok
8 5V Green light = voltage ok
Green light = voltage ok
9 24 OFF Red light = Loss of power supply for motors (e.g. in
emergency stop)
10
11 FPGA status See table below on FPGA LEDs.
12
Green light shows HVG tunnelling activity and is lit
13 HVG status
when receiving and sending data from/to the HVG.
13 HVG status Green light = HVG initialized correctly
This LED is switched on in the beginning of the main
loop and switched off at the end of the main loop. If
14 Software active
the LED is lit continuously or not lit at all this would
indicate that the software is not running.
Green light = n/a
Red light = Any of the emergency stop buttons have
been pressed
Not illuminated = Normal operation
FPGA LEDs
10 11 12 Active motor
OFF OFF OFF No motor active
OFF OFF ON C-arm rotation motor active
OFF ON OFF Compression motor active
OFF ON ON C-arm height motor active
ON OFF OFF Scan motor active
ON OFF ON Collimator motor active
ON ON OFF Aux motor active
ON ON ON N/A
1007989 O 270 (322)

20.4.2 Push-buttons
SCS features three pushbuttons for use in testing, debugging etcetera and one pushbutton for
manually resetting the board, only the reset button will be reachable from outside the
enclosure.
20.5Drawings
Drawings can be found under the corresponding tabs in the service binder delivered with the
system.
For technical data and mechanical overviews of the different Philips MicroDose
configurations, water/air cooled and American/Asian/European, see:
1. Chapter 2 in this document and
2. Technical specification, ref [3].
20.5.1 Electrical drawings

When performing measurements and/or service due to
electrical problems it is recommended to use the electrical
drawings found under the tab Electrical drawings in the
service binder.
The drawing 1007143 Cable survey is a good overview.
This drawing can also be found under the tab Electrical
drawings in the service binder.
Figure 215 Cable survey drawing.
20.5.2 Mechanical drawings
For mechanical problems, use exploded diagrams and other drawings found under the tab
Mechanical drawings in the service binder in order to get a better understanding.
1007989 O 271 (322)

20.6Scan movement
20.6.1 Move scan motor bracket
This action might be needed if the test of scan movement end stops (chapter 15.2) fails.
Preparation
Stand in Emergency stop mode
Procedure
1. Loosen (do not remove) the three Allen screws (A) securing the motor bracket to the
C-arm. See Figure 216.
Mount the scan motor fixture (B) on the linear guide and secure the fixture to the motor
bracket using the two Allen screws (C). The fixture will ensure that the motor bracket remains
parallel to the linear guide.)
Adjust the position of the motor bracket.
Tighten the screw (D).
Secure the motor bracket to the C-arm using the three Allen screws (A) at 5.7 Nm.
Remove the scan motor fixture (B).
Figure 216 Adjustment of the scan motor bracket position.
20.6.2 Adjust the position of the scan movement readhead

The position of the readhead might need to be adjusted:
If the LED of the readhead is not green throughout the whole scan movement. See
chapter 15.3.
If the values from the scan movement readhead are not stable.
Preparation
Stand in Emergency stop mode
Tools
1015462 Readhead setting jig 0.8mm
1007989 O 272 (322)

2.5 mm Allen key
Procedure
1. Align the scan wagon to the two holes (A).
Loosen the two screws (B) securing the readhead
Insert the readhead spacer (C) under the readhead (D) for a rough alignment.
Tighten the two screws (B) a little bit to allow adjustment.
Remove the readhead spacer (C).
Move the scan mechanics back and forth observing the LED of the readhead. The LED should
be green along the whole movement. If the LED turns red the position of the readhead need to
be adjusted.
When the LED is green through the whole movement, secure the readhead to the scan wagon
with the two screws (B).
Figure 217 Adjust the position of the scan movement readhead using the readhead spacer (1015462).
1007989 O 273 (322)

20.7Collimator movement
20.7.1 If the collimator screw is deviating more than 2 mm
Solution
Try to loosen the mechanics and remount according to the appropriate sub-chapters in chapter
13.24.
20.7.2 If the collimator motor currents exceeds maximum levels.

Solution
Check that the collimator curtain, X-ray prevent cover and collimator screw moves smoothly.
20.7.3 If the spatial resolution is below 5 lp/mm.

Solution
Check if the collimator height is correct.
Perform an ACA
Perform a Geometry Calibration
1007989 O 274 (322)

20.8Compression movement
20.8.1 If Compression Force calibration fails
Solution
1. Run the calibration again. Make sure that all compression measurements are
performed directly after compressing to the desired force level, if over-compressed,
decompress fully before recompressing.
If it still fails, follow the Motion smoothness guide.
20.8.2 Motion smoothness guide

1. Verify that the compression movement is smooth by putting the C-arm in 90 degrees,
setting the system in emergency stop and moving the compression assembly by hand
throughout its range.
If there is a distinct point where the compression assembly gets stuck, look for obstructing
cables, contact between the compression assembly and the C-arm covers or if there is any
visible dirt on the Rollco rail, the Linear bearing or the ball screw.
If the motion is smooth but the overall friction too great, readjusting the pre-tension in the
Rollco rail may give an improvement.
1007989 O 275 (322)

20.9X-ray system problem identification

Investigating a fault in the X-ray system can be tricky since many of the error codes can be
caused both by the tube and the generator. There are some guidelines that can help to identify
which part that is to blame, some of these are summarized below.
Ask yourself these questions:

When does the problem occur? In the beginning of the scan? In the end of the scan? At
Compression Done?
Does the problem occur at any specific condition or setting? kV setting? Short or long
scan? Only in mornings?
Does the problem occur every time the action is tried or how often does it occur?
Was something different or did something else occur when the problems started?
Check the CCS-log. Which error messages can be seen? What happened right before
the fault started to occur?
Does the generator LEDs look normal? Is any fault LEDs shown? Which?
Also, when reporting an X-ray system problem try to remember the following:
Get as much information about the problem as possible, e.g. answer the questions
above.
Attach CCS-log and possibly examples of the problem (could be screenshots).
Explain what troubleshooting has been done so far.
Attach serial no of tube, serial no and revision of generator, firmware version of
generator.
New tubes can arc the first weeks, especially in the morning. This most often levels out and
arcs will be fewer and fewer. Doing a couple of low kV, low mAs exposures in the mornings
can reduce the arcing.
20.9.1 Filament cable

The filament cable is straight so measurements according to Figure 218 can be performed
either at generator side of the filament cable or directly at the contact of the tube. If a fault is
discovered at the generator side of the filament cable, a measurement at the tube contact
(Figure 219) is needed in order to decide the source of the problem.
An ohm meter is used to measure resistance between the points. Normal values for the
filament, pin 8-9 and pin 6-9, are 0.2-1 ohm. Normal values for the thermal switch are about
0.2 ohm.
Figure 218 Filament cable pinout.
1007989 O 276 (322)

Figure 219 Filament contact at X-ray tube.
1007989 O 277 (322)

20.9.2 LEDs on the generator

The state of the generator can be seen
on the LEDs on the lower side of the
generator.
Next to the LEDs the generator has
four test points. Using an oscilloscope
one can obtain curves of the kV, mA
and filament feedback.
Figure 220 LEDs and test points on the generator.
Table 6 List of generator LEDs.
LED Description Comment

DS4 (big green LED) POWER
DS5 (big yellow LED) READY
DS6 (big yellow LED) LOADING
DS9 (big red LED) FAULT Blinks once or is latched at a
fault condition.
DS8 (big yellow LED) HSS ON
DS7 (big yellow LED) FIL ON
DS10 (small red LED) FPGA heartbeat Flashes with approx. 2 sec
interval.
DS3 (small green LED) 3.3 V ON Indicates that the 3.3 V
supply is operational (FPGA
and DSP core voltage is
present)
DS11 (small red LED) DC rail fault
DS12 (small red LED) Arc
DS13 (small red LED) Filament overcurrent
DS14 (small red LED) kV regulation fault
DS15 (small red LED) mA regulation fault
DS16 (small red LED) Over mA fault
DS17 (small red LED) Over kV fault
Normal condition for the generator LEDs are:

DS4 lit
DS7 lit
DS3 lit
DS10 blinking
1007989 O 278 (322)

20.9.3 High voltage

indicator
If high voltage is present in the generator
an orange light can be seen through the
holes on the top of the generator.
When generator is shut off it will take
about 5 min before the high voltage is
discharged and the light goes out.
Figure 221 Orange light indicating high voltage in the

generator.
20.9.4 Active errors
If the generator is non functional but fault codes are missing or unclear in the log file one can
retrieve the current active generator errors by using a HVG-tab in the Calibration tool. The
procedure is described below.
3. Choose Advanced mode in the Settings-menu, the password is 0123.
4. Select the HVG-tab.
The HVG-tab can be used to change vital parameters in the generator. Do

Notice
not change anything else than instructed.
5. Click the plus sign next to ActiveErrors to open the collapsed list, see Figure 222.
Figure 222 Expanding the ActiveErrors list.
1007989 O 279 (322)

6. Click the Update tree to get the current status, see Figure 223.
Figure 223 Click on Update tree to show the current values in the main window.
Use the Error codes and solutions, section 20.13, to get advice on how to handle the
possible faults listed under Active Errors.
1007989 O 280 (322)

20.10 Potentiometer problem identification

This section will help to identify if there is a potentiometer related problem. Figure 224 is
used to refer to the individual terminals on the potentiometer.
Figure 224 Potentiometer terminals.
20.10.1 C-Rotation potentiometer

Follow the guideline below and stop upon identification of the problem source (if any).
1. Check that the potentiometer draw wire is connected to the rotation unit and that it
springs back properly when drawn out (by hand).
a. If not OK, replace the potentiometer and perform a rotation calibration.
Perform a calibration mode reset in SCS Calibration Tool.
Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 3 on the rotation potentiometer if it is
3.3V 0.1V then continue to the next step.
b. Measure the voltage between pin A2 and pin A3 on connector K5 on the SCS
unit, it should be 3.3V 0.1V.
i. If not OK, contact product support. Replacement of the SCS Unit
will probably be needed.
ii. If OK, there must be a problem with the cables. Make sure that the
cables are not damaged and that they are correctly mounted. If no
problem with the cables is found, contact Product support.
1007989 O 281 (322)

Make sure that the potentiometer works and that the SCS measures it correctly by:
c. Use the stand buttons to rotate the C-arm to 0. Measure the angle manually.
d. Take a note of the C-Rotation potentiometer value (in mV) from the runtime
page in SCT (the stand must be physically at 0).
e. Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 2 (red probe on terminal 2) on
the potentiometer with a multimeter (see Figure 224). If the measured voltage
(with the multimeter) is negative, move the black probe from terminal 1 to
terminal 3. Take a note of the measured voltage.
f. Rotate the C-arm to 45. Measure the angle manually.
g. Take a note of the C-Rotation potentiometer value (in mV) from the runtime
page in SCT (the stand must be physically at 45).
h. Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 2 (red probe on terminal 2) on
the potentiometer with a multimeter (Figure 224). If the measured voltage
i. Control the measurements:
i. The voltage measured with the multimeter must have changed with at
least 250mV. If no change has occurred there is a problem with the
potentiometer. Replace the potentiometer and perform a rotation
calibration.
ii. The voltage measured by calibration tool must have changed with at
least 250mV. If no change has occurred there is a problem with
either the cables or the SCS Unit. Make sure that the cables are not
damaged and that they are correctly mounted. If no problem with the
cables can be found, the problem probably lies with the SCS Unit.
Contact Product support.
Perform a C-rotation calibration.
Perform a test of the C-arm rotation potentiometer from SCS Calibration Tool. The test is
initiated by selecting Test Potentiometers Check C-arm potentiometer from the menu.
On the graph presented, the range shall be 2 and the absolute value of the offset 1.
If the problem remains, contact product support.
1007989 O 282 (322)

20.10.2 Height potentiometer

Follow the guideline below and stop upon identification of the problem source (if any).
1. Check that the potentiometer draw wire is connected to the rotation unit and that it
springs back properly when drawn out (by hand).
a. If not OK, replace the potentiometer and perform a height calibration.
Perform a calibration mode reset in SCS Calibration Tool.
Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 3 on the height potentiometer if it is
3.3V 0.1V then continue to the next step.
b. Measure the voltage between pin A2 and pin A3 on connector K5 on the SCS
unit, it should be 3.3V 0.1V.
i. If not OK, contact Product support. Replacement of the SCS Unit
will probably be needed.
ii. If OK, there must be a problem with the cables. Make sure that the
cables are not damaged and that they are correctly mounted. If no
problem with the cables is found, contact Product support.
Make sure that the potentiometer works and that the SCS measures it correctly by:
a. Use the stand buttons to set the height to 100cm. Measure the height
manually.
b. Take a note of the Height potentiometer value (in mV) from the runtime page
in SCT (the stand must be physically at 100cm).
c. Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 2 (red probe on terminal 2) on
terminal 3.
d. Move the C-arm to 110 cm, measure the height manually. Take a note of the
measured voltage.
e. Take a note of the Height potentiometer value (in mV) from the runtime page
in SCT (the stand must be physically at 110cm).
f. Measure the voltage between terminals 1 and 2 (red probe on terminal 2) on
g. Control the measurements:
iii. The voltage measured with the multimeter must have changed with at
least 550mV. If no change has occurred, there is a problem with the
potentiometer. Replace the potentiometer and perform a height
calibration.
iv. The voltage measured by calibration tool must have changed with at
least 550mV. If no change has occurred, there is a problem with
either the cables or the SCS Unit. Make sure that the cables are not
damaged and that they are correctly mounted. If no problem can be
found with the cables, then the problem probably lies with the SCS
Unit. Contact Product support.
If the problem still remains, contact Product support.
1007989 O 283 (322)

20.11 Encoder problem identification

This section will help to identify if there is an encoder related problem.
20.11.1 C-arm rotation

1. Perform a calibration mode reset in SCS Calibration Tool.
This test is designed for a C_Rot with an EncResolution parameter (encoder units/degree) of
272. All the calculations hence forwards use 272 but if the EncResolution of your particular
stand differs then recalculate the values with that particular EncResolution.
Rotate the C-arm to an angle of -90 using the stand buttons, use a digital water level to get
the physical angle within 1 (it is important to be very precise).
Note down the encoder value of the C-rotation motor from the runtime page in SCT.
Rotate the C-arm to an angle of 90 using the stand buttons, use a digital water level to get the
physical angle within 1 (it is important to be very precise).
The new encoder value should have changed by more than [EncResolution]*(180 - 5) =
47600units. If not, there is a problem with the C-arm rotation encoder signal.
If the previous step was OK, rotate the C-arm to an angle of -90 using the stand buttons.
Uuse a digital water level to get the physical angle within 1 (it is important to be very
precise).
The new encoder value should be within [EncResolution]*(2) = 544units of the original
encoder value at -90. If it is not, then there is a problem with the C-arm rotation encoder
signal.
If you have come this far without a problem then it is probably not a problem with the
encoder signal.
20.11.2 C-arm height

1. Perform a calibration mode reset in SCS Calibration Tool.
2. This test is designed for a C_Rot with an EncResolution parameter (encoder
units/degree) of 272. All the calculations hence forwards use 272 but if the
EncResolution of your particular stand differs then recalculate the values with that
particular EncResolution.
3. Rotate the C-arm to an angle of -90 using the stand buttons, use a digital water level
to get the physical angle within 1 (it is important to be very precise).
4. Note down the encoder value of the C-rotation motor from the runtime page in SCT.
5. Rotate the C-arm to an angle of 90 using the stand buttons, use a digital water level
to get the physical angle within 1 (it is important to be very precise).
6. The new encoder value should have changed by more than [EncResolution]*(180 -
5) = 47600units. If not, there is a problem with the C-arm rotation encoder signal.
7. If the previous step was OK, rotate the C-arm to an angle of -90 using the stand
buttons. Use a digital water level to get the physical angle within 1 (it is important
to be very precise).
8. The new encoder value should be within [EncResolution]*(2) = 544units of the
original encoder value at -90. If it is not, then there is a problem with the C-arm
rotation encoder signal.
9. If you have come this far without a problem then it is probably not a problem with the
encoder signal.
1007989 O 284 (322)

20.11.3 Scan
1. Set the projection to 0.
Perform a calibration mode reset with no start movement in SCS Calibration Tool.
Note down MaxPosition parameter for the Scan motor for later use.
Push the scan arm all the way to the left hand end stop. (Use the arrow button in the SCT if
the scan arm is too hard to move by hand, but be careful!)
Note down the encoder value of the scan motor from the runtime page in SCT.
Push the scan arm all the way to the right hand end stop.
The new encoder value should have changed by more than [MaxPosition] units (the
parameter previously noted down), if it has not then there is a problem with the scan encoder
signal.
If the previous step was OK, push the scan arm all the way back to the left hand end stop.
The new encoder value should be within 300units of the original encoder value at the left
hand end stop. If it is not, then there is a problem with the scan encoder signal.
encoder signal.
20.11.4 Collimator
1. Set the projection to 0 and remove the compression paddle.
This test is designed for a Collimator with an EncResolution parameter (encoder units/cm) of
4000. All the calculations hence forwards use 4000 but if the EncResolution of your particular
stand differs then recalculate the values with that particular EncResolution.
Note down MaxPosition parameter for the Collimator motor for later use.
Push the collimator all the way to the upper end stop.
Note down the encoder value of the collimator motor from the runtime page in SCT.
Push the collimator all the way to the bottom end stop.
The new encoder value should have changed by more than ([MaxPosition] -
[EncResolution]/10) = ([MaxPosition] 400) units, if it has not then there is a problem with
the collimator encoder signal.
If the previous step was OK, push the collimator all the way back to the upper end stop.
The new encoder value should be within ([EncResolution]/10) = 400units of the original
encoder value at the upper end stop. If it is not, then there is a problem with the collimator
encoder signal.
encoder signal.
1007989 O 285 (322)

20.11.5 Compression
1. Set the projection to 0 and remove the compression paddle.
This test is designed for a Compression with an EncResolution parameter (encoder
units/cm) of 5000. All the calculations hence forwards use 5000 but if the
EncResolution of your particular stand differs then recalculate the values with that
particular EncResolution.
Note down MaxPosition parameter for the Compression motor for later use.
Push the compression arm all the way to the upper end stop.
Note down the encoder value of the compression motor from the runtime page in SCT.
Push the compression arm all the way to the bottom end stop.
The new encoder value should have changed by more than ([MaxPosition] -
[EncResolution]/10) = ([MaxPosition] 500) units, if it has not then there is a
problem with the compression encoder signal.
If the previous step was OK, push the compression arm all the way back to the upper end
stop.
The new encoder value should be within ([EncResolution]/10) = 500units of the original
encoder value at the upper end stop. If it is not, then there is a problem with the
compression encoder signal.
encoder signal.
1007989 O 286 (322)

20.12 Emergency stops

The emergency stop loop consists of two parallel closed loops with emergency stop buttons
that close the loop when inactive and break it when active. The top side feeds 24V into the
loop and the bottom side senses the 24V, if the loop is broken then there will not be 24V at
the bottom side and the emergency stop is detected. As a safety precaution the emergency
stop loop consists of two independent loops that run in parallel.
The layout of a stop button is shown in Figure 225. If the switch is activated the continuity
between pin 11 and 12, and pin 21 and 22 will be broken. Note though that the compression
emergency stop switch is not a normal emergency stop button, it is a special mechanical
solution to detect compression in excess of roughly 250N and enter emergency stop as a last
resort if all software limits fail. Also, the stereo emergency stop is bypassed with a dongle
(article number: 1012177) that simply closes the loop.
Figure 225 Emergency stop button layout
If the stand is in emergency stop (the display shows: STOP) even though all emergency stop
switches have been deactivated then there is a high chance that one of the cables or one of the
emergency stop buttons have broken. The diagram shown in Figure 226 can be used to help
find the cause of the problem. One can either have the power connected to the SCS Unit and
have all the cables connected and try to find where the 24V disappears in order to narrow
down the search. Another way is to disconnect the cables and measure on the cables and find
which of the cables that has no continuity.
1007989 O 287 (322)

EM-loop 1
EM-loop 2
SCS Unit
Pin 101
Pin 103
24V
AW
K2
P Pin 104
Pin 102
Pin A3
Pin A5
Left Side
On Stand Pin A6
Pin A4
K7
Pin B1
Pin B3
Right Side
On Stand Pin B4
Pin B2
Pin A1
Pin A3
Compression
K16
(HW over compression

protection, not an actual Pin A4
emergency stop switch) Pin A2
Pin A7
Pin A9
Stereo
K18
(Replaced with a dongle that

keeps the loop closed Pin A10
at all time [1012177]) EM Stop
Pin A8
Detection
Figure 226 Emergency stop loop diagram
1007989 O 288 (322)

20.13 Error codes and solutions

The error codes are divided into three parts:
(<source>-<error>-<action>)
Source Name Description

1 CCS Control Computer Service on the AW computer
2 StandControl Communication between CCS and SCS.
3 SCS The Stand Control System.
4 HVG The High Voltage Generator.
5 DaqControl Data acquisition handling in the CCS.
6 DAQ The data acquisition subsystem, i.e. IPB and DU.
7 StandComm Communication between the CCS and AWS.
8 Not used
9 DaqInterface Communication between CCS and IPB
10 CalibrationCheck Calibration and quality check status messages.
11 HvgControl Communication and between CCS and HVG.
Action Description
0 Guidance message: An instruction to help the user to perform the correct action.
1 Notice: An important but not critical message.
2 Reset of the system is required to continue.
3 A full calibration is required to continue.
4 Recommendation to contact product support, due to a configuration error or non-
recoverable fault.
5 A DQC (daily quality control) is required to continue.
6 Reset of the system and DQC is required to continue.
7 A DQC is recommended before continuing.
8 A Full calibration is recommended before continuing.
9 A Warm-up procedure is recommended before continuing.
Error Each module has a list of definitions of errors. The error code is passed on to and
collected by the CCS.
The CCS is translating the error message and writes an error message in plain text in the
error-log.
The error code X-X-X is passed on to the AWS by the CCS. The AWS has its own lists of
translations, which are displayed for the user. The AWS translations can be edited.
For the error codes starting with a 4, trouble shooting help can be found in chapter 20.9.
1007989 O 289 (322)

Error code Log message Cause Action

Check CCS log file for details. Most likely the
local configuration of CCS is wrong. Check
1-1-4 Invalid configuration. CCS configuration error.
def files for CCS and make sure "{" and "}"
are correct used. Make it right.
CCS configuration error. Check CCS log file for details. Most likely the
Invalid configuration of Tried to use not local configuration of CCS is wrong. Check
1-2-4
exposure modes. configured Exposure def files for CCS and make sure "{" and "}"
mode. are correct used. Make it right.
Check CCS log file for details. Most likely the
Invalid configuration of CCS configuration error.
local configuration of CCS is wrong. Check
1-3-4 exposure No valid Exposure
def files for CCS and make sure "{" and "}"
configurations. Configuration configured.
are correct used. Make it right.
CCS configuration error. Check CCS log file for details. Most likely the
Invalid configuration of Configuration/Calibration local configuration of CCS is wrong. Check
1-10-4
compression paddles. does not exist for selected def files for CCS and make sure "{" and "}"
compression paddle. are correct used. Make it right.
Has calibration files wrong access rights? Is
Failed to store AEC Failed storing calibration
1-20-4 user account no default, with wrong access
calibration to disk
rights? Contact product support.
Failed to store Asic Failed storing calibration
calibration to disk
Failed to store Failed storing calibration
geometry calibration to disk
Failed to store channel Failed storing calibration
mask to disk
Failed to store flat field Failed storing calibration
calibration to disk
Failed to store Has calibration files wrong access rights? Is
Failed storing calibration
1-25-4 compression paddle user account no default, with wrong access
to disk
calibration rights? Contact product support.
Failed to store Failed storing calibration
collimator calibration to disk
Failed to store DQC Failed storing calibration
status to disk
Failed to find flatfield
1-30-4 Internal error. Bug in CCS. Contact product support.
data.
Failed to find flatfield
data.
The CCS log should be examined, looking for
the message "AEC measurement lags...". If
The AEC failed to
reported lagging is frequently above 100 trigs,
The exposure accuracy compensate for an abrupt
1-32-1 check that the AW computer is not running
was not as expected. change in density in the
processing-intensive external software.
imaged object.
Contact product support if the problem
remains.
The exposure was not
as expected. Check The mAs differs too much
Check that the compression paddle is
that correct from what is expected
1-33-1 correctly indicated and that normal/implant is
compression paddle based on the compression
correctly indicated.
and correct mode is height.
selected.
Stand was emergency
The stand has been
1-41-2 stopped when AWS Reset the system
emergency stopped.
connected.
1007989 O 290 (322)


Tried to change The user is not allowed to
compression paddle change compression
1-45-0 -
setting after paddle after pressing
CompDone. compression done.
Tried to change
Internal error. Bug in
1-47-4 compression paddle Contact product support.
CCS/AWS.
setting in stereo mode.
When the user disables
keep compression during
Keep compression a wire-localization
1-48-1 -
manually disabled. examination, this
message is shown as a
reminder.
GetImage called when Internal error. Bug in
1-50-4 Contact product support.
image is not ready. CCS/AWS.
The detector is in error
1-60-0 - Reset the system.
state.
Please wait while the
1-61-0 - -
detector is warming up.
Please wait while the X-
1-62-0 - -
ray tube cools.
The stand is in CCS handles stand as if it
emergency stop. was emergency stopped.
Restore all stop Stand might not Reset. (And if applicable: Restore stop
1-63-0
switches and reset the necessarily be stopped by switches.)
system before stop switches, or stopped
proceeding. at all.
The stand needs a
1-64-0 reset before - -
proceeding.
Please wait while the
1-65-0 - -
stand resets.
There is no connection
CCS has no connection to Reset. If problem remains verify that IPB is
1-70-2 with the image
IPB. responding, check fibre.
processing board.
AWS enabled exposure Internal error. Bug in
in wrong state. CCS/AWS.
Internal error. Bug in
1-100-4 Internal CCS error. Contact product support.
CCS/AWS.
Reset called with no
controls.
Failed to write to
exposure log.
Compression done was Internal error. Bug in Reset the system
1-110-2
disabled in wrong state. CCS/AWS. Contact product support.
Disconnected in wrong Internal error. Bug in
state. CCS/AWS.
Happens sometimes
If connection is established directly
during reset. Otherwise
afterwards, check processes on computer if
the communication
any have unusual high CPU time. Otherwise
Lost connection with between CCS and SCS
2-1-2 connection between CCS and SCS has
Stand Control System. has problems. Either SCS
problems. Communication is tunnelled
does not respond, or AW
through IPB, so check status of IPB network
processor is too busy to
and fibre.
handle communication.
Connection problem Internal error. Bug in CCS
2-3-2 with Stand Control (This message should Contact product support.
System. never occur.)
Wrong communication CCS cannot communicate
Verify that versions of CCS and SCS are
2-4-4 interface to Stand with SCS due to wrong
correct.
Control System. interface version.
Common error when CCS Reset, try again. If remaining. Verify that CCS
The ASAP
fails to communicate with and SCS can communicate at all. Check log
2-10-2 communication failed.
SCS. Might also be an files and determine what caused this
Reset and try again.
internal error. message.
1007989 O 291 (322)


The stand has
2-15-2 emergency stopped. - -
Please reset.
Internal error. No
callback pointer.
Incorrect data received
2-101-2 Internal error. Contact product support.
from SCS.
If recurring then replace the SCS Unit.
3-20-2 Failed to initialize time. Internal error. Always report this problem to product
support.
If recurring then replace the SCS Unit.
Failed to initialize
3-21-2 Internal error. Always report this problem to product
interrupt.
support.
This error is always preceded by an error
The self-diagnostic check
code explaining why the emergency stop test
3-22-2 Emergency stop fault on the emergency stop
failed. Take action based on the preceding
system failed.
error code.
This error code is always preceded by an
error code explaining why the initialization
At least one of the motors failed. Take action based on the preceding
Failed to initialize
3-23-2 in the stand failed to error code.
motors.
initialize. Note: There are often several errors reported
in conjunction with this error, always look at
the first error reported in the log.
Make sure all emergency stops are released
Attempting to reset the then reset the system.
Emergency stop
3-26-1 stand with an emergency If all emergency stops are released and the
pressed.
stop activated. problem remains, then see section 20.12 for
trouble shooting help.
If it happens sporadically during compression
it is likely a problem with the compression
switch calibration.
1. Perform a compression switch calibration
and a normal compression calibration
from the SCT.
An emergency stop was
2. If the problem remains then it is likely that
Emergency stop pressed or the hardware
3-26-2 there is a problem with the compression
pressed. compression protection
mechanics. See the mechanics section of
switch was activated.
this manual for support regarding those
problems or contact product support.
If it happens sporadically without the
compression active then it is probably a loose
connection or a bad emergency stop switch.
Refer to section 20.12.
The emergency stop was The CCS log should contain information
3-27-2 Emergency stop CCS.
activated by the CCS. about why the stand was emergency stopped.
If the problem is recurring then:
1. To find out if there is an encoder problem
use the guide in section 20.11. If there is
The stand failed to control an encoder problem, then:
the position of the C-arm a. Inspect all cables and connectors
rotation. This can be related to the encoder signal and make
caused by: sure that they are not damaged or
disconnected.
Following error for C- Damaged encoder
3-30-2 b. Contact product support, an encoder
arm rotation. cables or broken
replacement will probably be needed.
encoder.
2. Make sure all servo parameters (All
Incorrect servo
parameters that start with Servo., e.g.
parameters.
Servo.Kp) for this motor are correct
Other problem according to the default parameters for
the installed software package (e.g. SW
8.2).
3. Contact product support.
1007989 O 292 (322)


The stand failed to control use the guide in section 20.11. If there is
the position of the an encoder problem, then:
compression. This can be a. Inspect all cables and connectors
caused by: related to the encoder signal and make
sure that they are not damaged or
Following error for Damaged encoder
3-31-2 disconnected.
compression. cables or broken
b. Contact product support, an encoder
encoder.
Incorrect servo
2. Make sure all servo parameters for this
parameters.
motor are correct according to the default
Other problem parameters for the installed software
package (e.g. SW 8.2).
the position of the C-arm a. Inspect all cables and connectors
height. This can be related to the encoder signal and make
disconnected.
Following error for C- Damaged encoder
arm height. cables or broken
encoder.
Incorrect servo
parameters.
8.2).
the position of scan arm. a. Inspect all cables and connectors
This can be caused by: related to the encoder signal and make
sure that they are not damaged or
Damaged encoder
Following error for disconnected.
3-33-2 cables or broken
scan. b. Contact product support, an encoder
encoder.
Incorrect servo
parameters.
Other problem Servo.Kp) for this motor are correct
according to the default parameters for
the installed software package.
the position of the a. Inspect all cables and connectors
collimator. This can be related to the encoder signal and make
disconnected.
Following error for Damaged encoder
collimator. cables or broken
encoder.
Incorrect servo
parameters.
8.2).
1007989 O 293 (322)


If the collision occurs sporadically without any
real collision then follow these points until the
problem is solved:
1. Perform a collimator collision calibration.
The stand detected a
3-37-2 Collimator collision. 2. Make sure the collimator movement is
collimator collision.
mechanically OK, if it is not then adjust
the mechanics and perform a collimator
collision calibration.
Scan was aborted due to The CCS log should contain information
3-38-2 Scan interrupted.
a request from the CCS. about why it aborted the scan.
If it is a recurring error then follow these
points until the problem is solved:
1. Check if the fuse has blown. If it has
blown then replace it. If the problem
keeps coming back then go on to the next
step.
2. Follow section 10.1.2 for this motor to
make sure that the motor is working
The SCS tried to output correctly. If it isnt then check that the
Max voltage exceeded more power to the C-arm cables and the motor arent damaged and
3-40-2
for C-arm rotation. rotation motor than is replace any broken part.
allowed. 3. Check that the encoder is working
correctly by following the relevant part of
section 20.11. If it isnt then check that
the cables and the encoder arent
damaged and replace any broken part.
4. Check that the mechanics related to this
movement is working correctly and
lubricate if needed.
step.
Max voltage exceeded more power to the cables and the motor arent damaged and
3-41-2
for compression. compression motor than is replace any broken part.
step.
Max voltage exceeded more power to the C-arm cables and the motor arent damaged and
3-42-2
for C-arm height. height motor than is replace any broken part.
20.11. If it isnt then check that the cables
and the encoder arent damaged and
replace any broken part.
1007989 O 294 (322)


1. Control if the fuse has blown. If it has
step.
correctly. If it isnt then check that the
The SCS tried to output
Max voltage exceeded cables and the motor arent damaged and
3-43-2 more power to the scan
for scan. replace any broken part.
arm motor than is allowed.
3. Check that the encoder is working
step.
Max voltage exceeded more power to the cables and the motor arent damaged and
3-44-2
for collimator. collimator motor than is replace any broken part.
The SCS monitors the C-
arm rotation encoder and
Too large difference
potentiometers to make
between calculated
sure that they report
3-45-2 potentiometer position See section 20.10.1 for trouble shooting.
roughly the same height
and encoder position
as a security measure.
for C-rotation.
This error indicates that
this check failed.
The SCS monitors the C-
arm height encoder and
Too large difference
potentiometers to make
between calculated
sure that they report
3-46-2 potentiometer position See section 20.10.2 for trouble shooting
roughly the same height
and encoder position
as a security measure.
for Height.
This error indicates that
this check failed.
Contact lost with CCS while SCS is in
ASAP communication The CCS took too long to
3-50-1 calibration mode. No emergency stop will
timeout. reply to a sent packet.
occur but all motors will be stopped.
If this a recurring problem then follow this list
until the problem is fixed:
1. Reset the whole system (turn it off and
then back on again).
ASAP communication The CCS took too long to
3-50-2 2. Replace the Ethernet cable between the
timeout. reply to a sent packet.
CCS and the IPB
3. Replace the Fibre cable between the
AWC and the CCS.
1007989 O 295 (322)


The SCS detected that the
Reset the system. If this is a recurring
Exposure Button was
The exposure button problem:
released during exposure.
was released before 1. Inform user on how to correctly operate
3-65-2 Possible causes:
image acquisition the system
User mistake
finished. 2. Search loop for broken or poorly fitting
Exposure button loop
cables, connectors etc
faulty.
The max exposure time
Exposure did not finish Reset the system. If this is a recurring
3-66-2 limit was exceeded during
within deadline. problem then contact product support.
scan.
Potentiometer based
Failed to initialize C-
3-70-2 position initialization failed See section 20.10.1 for trouble shooting.
arm rotation.
for the C-arm rotation.
Mechanical stop based
Failed to initialize error code explaining why the initialization
3-71-2 position initialization for
compression. failed. Take action based on the preceding
the compression failed.
error code.
Potentiometer based
Failed to initialize C-
3-72-2 position initialization failed See section 20.10.2 for trouble shooting
arm height.
for the C-arm height.
error code explaining why the initialization
3-73-2 Failed to initialize scan. position initialization for
failed. Take action based on the preceding
the scan arm failed.
error code.
Failed to initialize error code explaining why the initialization
3-74-2 position initialization for
collimator. failed. Take action based on the preceding
the collimator failed.
error code.
If this is a recurring problem then it indicates
that the mechanics for this movement isnt
Overcurrent C-arm more current to the C-arm
3-80-2 working properly. Make sure all parts are
rotation. rotation motor than is
lubricated and well adjusted. If this doesnt
allowed.
solve the problem, contact product support.
Overcurrent more current to the
compression. compression motor than is
allowed.
Overcurrent C-arm more current to the C-arm
height. height motor than is
allowed.
The SCS tried to output that the mechanics for this movement isnt
3-83-2 Overcurrent scan. more current to the scan working properly. Make sure all parts are
arm motor than is allowed. lubricated and well adjusted. If this doesnt
more current to the
3-84-2 Overcurrent collimator. working properly. Make sure all parts are
collimator motor than is
allowed.
Hardware overcurrent more current to the C-arm
C-arm rotation. rotation motor than is
allowed.
Hardware overcurrent more current to the
compression. compression motor than is
allowed.
1007989 O 296 (322)


Hardware overcurrent more current to the C-arm
C-arm height. height motor than is
allowed.
The SCS tried to output that the mechanics for this movement isnt
Hardware overcurrent
3-93-2 more current to the scan working properly. Make sure all parts are
scan.
arm motor than is allowed. lubricated and well adjusted. If this doesnt
Hardware overcurrent more current to the
collimator. collimator motor than is
allowed.
If this happened during an upgrade or other
maintenance work then restore the latest
Internal error. Failed to backup of the configuration and press store
Failed to load global
3-210-4 read the SCS parameters permanently.
configuration
from the EEPROM. If the problem persists or this problem
happened during normal operation then
contact product support.
Failed to save Internal error. Failed to
3-211-4 configuration save the SCS parameters Contact product support.
parameters to the EEPROM.
Failed to load CRot
motor parameters.
Failed to load Compr
motor parameters.
Failed to load Height
motor parameters.
Failed to load Scan
motor parameters.
Failed to load Coll
motor parameters.
Failed to load Aux
motor parameters.
1007989 O 297 (322)


Check in the log which command that was
3-233-0
One or more of the sent to the SCS and cause this error. This
3-233-1
Parameter out of parameters that were sent command should contain information about
3-233-2
bounds. to the SCS was outside the parameters that were sent. Check that
3-233-3
the allowed limits. they are within the bounds. If this doesnt
3-233-4
help, contact product support.
This happens when trying
3-235-0
to perform an action that Look in the CCS log for any other error
3-235-1
The action is not is currently not allowed, messages (in conjunction with this error) that
3-235-2
allowed at the moment. e.g. trying to set a can guide you to what the exact cause for the
3-235-3
projection when C-arm is problem was.
3-235-4
below home position.
Check in the log which command that was
One or more of the sent to the SCS and cause this error. This
Parameter out of parameters that were sent command should contain information about
3-233-4
bounds. to the SCS was outside the parameters that were sent. Check that
the allowed limits. they are within the bounds. If this doesnt
help, contact product support.
This happens when trying
The action is not Look in the CCS log for any other error
to perform an action that
allowed because an messages (in conjunction with this error) that
3-236-1 is not allowed when
image is being can guide you to what the exact cause for the
acquiring an image, e.g.
acquired. problem was.
trying to change side.
The action is only
Internal state error. Bug in
3-237-1 allowed when an image Report this problem to product support.
CCS/SCS.
is being acquired.
1. Make sure the InitPWM and InitSpeed
The SCS failed to find the
parameters matches those of the current
mechanical end stop with
Mechanical stops differ software packaged (e.g. SW 8.2) for the
3-241-4 enough precision for the
for compression. current motor.
compression movement
2. Make sure the mechanical parts for this
during reset.
movement are well lubricated and that the
movement is smooth.
for scan. current motor.
during reset.
movement is smooth.
for collimator. current motor.
during reset.
movement is smooth.
Make sure the collimator length is correctly
calibrated and recalibrate the collimator
length if it is not.
The CCS tried to set a
If the problem remains then check that the
Failed to set collimator collimator position that
3-250-4 collimators lower mechanical position is ok.
position. was outside the calibrated
Do not forget to recalibrate the collimator
collimator range.
length after the problem has been corrected.
If the actions above do not solve the problem,
The SCS detected that the
Collimator moved collimator moved too Check the collimator mechanics. Contact
3-251-1
during scan. much from its ideal product support if the problem persists.
position during a scan.
1007989 O 298 (322)


Make sure that the following signal path is
intact:
The SCS is equipped with
The signal goes from the SCS board, pin
logic to identify if a
K15-A1, through Cable Signal Upper SCS-
collimator is connected or
CAB (1006991) to C-arm CAB upper right
not. This feature is
(1009349), pin J25-A1. From there it goes to
currently not implemented
pin J11-15 and through the flat cable
in the mechanics, so the
3-253-0 No collimator attached. (1009515) to C-arm CAB upper left
signal is shorted to ground
(1009348), pin J11-15. The signal is then
(to emulate a connected
shorted to ground on connector J18 with the
collimator). If this
Collimator present jumper (1010941). The
message appears it must
jumper simply shorts pin J18-A2
be that this signal is not
(COLL_PRESENT) to J18-B3 (GROUND).
being properly asserted.
If no problem was found in the signal path
then contact product support.
Scan_SetScanParams
The action is not was called when in
3-256-0 allowed because ExposureEnabled. Report this problem to product support.
exposure is enabled. Internal error. Bug in
CCS/SCS.
Exposure enable is not CCS tried to enable Reset the system (normal mode).
3-257-0 allowed in calibration exposure while SCS is in If this problem occurs during normal
mode. calibration mode. operation, please contact product support.
Unknown ASAP command
Command not received.
3-260-4 Report this problem to product support.
supported. Internal error. Bug in
CCS/SCS.
User tried to perform
Compression done is Reset the system (normal mode).
compression done while
3-290-0 not allowed in If this problem occurs during normal
SCS is in calibration
calibration mode. operation, please contact product support.
mode.
If this problem occurs during normal
Trying to change (state) to operation, please contact product support.
Compression done is
3-300-0 compression done before This error would indicate timing or
not enabled.
it has been enabled. communication problems between the CCS
and the SCS.
Make sure that the Sin/Dx buttons are
Please select Left or No side (Sin/Dx) is
3-301-0 working correctly. They can be monitored and
Right. selected.
modified from SCS Calibration Tool.
The compression
The compression paddle
3-302-0 paddle is not low Compress more and try again.
is too high for exposure.
enough.
If it is a recurring problem where the stand
detects collisions when rotating without an
Collision C-arm The SCS detected a C- actual collision, then Perform a C-Rotation
3-310-1
rotation. arm rotation collision. Collision calibration in SCT.
If the problem remains then contact product
support.
Compression done is Trying to perform
not allowed when keep compression done when Deactivate the keep compression lock and
3-303-10
compression lock is keep compression lock is then try to perform compression done again.
active. active.
If it is a recurring problem where the stand
detects collisions when moving the C-arm
The SCS detected a C- up/down without an actual collision, then
3-311-1 Collision C-arm height.
arm height collision. Perform a Height Collision calibration in SCT.
If the problem remains then contact product
support.
The SCS detected a
problem with the C-arm If the problem is recurring then:
rotation collision detection 1. Check all cables and connectors that are
system. This can happen related to the C-arm rotational load cell
Collision fault C-arm
3-320-2 when: (CLC). All pins in the connectors must
rotation.
The cables from the look OK and cables must not be
SCS to the load cell damaged.
are damaged. 2. Contact product support
Other problem.
1007989 O 299 (322)


The SCS detected a
problem with the C-arm If the problem is recurring then:
height collision detection 1. Check all cables and connectors that are
system. This can happen related to the C-arm height load cell
Collision fault C-arm
3-321-2 when: (ZLC). All pins in the connectors must
height.
The cables from the look OK and cables must not be
SCS to the load cell damaged.
are damaged. 2. Contact product support
Other problem.
The user tried to change
The action is not
the C-arm Decompress fully before changing C-arm
3-500-0 allowed because
projection/height when projection/height.
compression is active.
compression was active.
The SCS detected a
Compression force problem with the If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-501-2
failure. compression force support.
measuring system.
The SCS detected a
Compression force problem with the If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-501-4
failure. compression force support.
measuring system.
The compression force
Max compression force
3-502-2 exceeded the software Report this problem to product support.
exceeded.
limit of 220N.
User tried to enable
compression done when
Wait for all movements to stop before
3-510-0 Movement is active. the C-arm rotation/height
activating compression done.
or the compression paddle
was moving.
If this problem occurs during normal
This error occurs if a C-
operation, please contact product.
arm (height or rotation)
This error would indicate timing or
Remote movement is movement is aborted by
3-514-0 communication problems between the CCS
not active. the CCS (AW) when such
and the SCS. (The user should not be able to
a movement has not been
stop a movement that has not been initiated,
initiated.
not even by accident.)
User tried to start a scan
Start scan command If this problem occurs during normal
3-540-1 while SCS is in a wrong
received in wrong state. operation, please contact product support.
state.
C-arm rotation
Trying to initiate C-arm
movement is not Deactivate the keep compression lock and
rotation movement when
3-550-10 allowed when keep then try to initiate C-arm rotation movement
the keep compression
compression lock is again.
lock is active.
active.
C-arm height
Trying to initiate C-arm
movement is not Deactivate the keep compression lock and
height movement when
3-551-10 allowed when keep then try to initiate C-arm height movement
the Keep compression
compression lock is again.
lock is active.
active.
Failed to save
calibration for load cell The SCS failed to save
If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1242-2 amplifiers (C-arm the calibration data to its
support.
rotation and C-arm permanent storage.
height).
Failed to load
calibration for load cell The SCS failed to load the
If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1243-2 amplifiers (C-arm calibration data from its
support.
rotation and C-arm permanent storage.
height).
This error occurs if there If this problem occurs during normal
Timeout reading data is a timeout while reading operation, please contact product.
3-1247-2
from load cell amplifier. data from the load cell This error could indicate SCS hardware
amplifier. problems.
This error occurs if there If this problem occurs during normal
Timeout waiting for
is a timeout while waiting operation, please contact product.
3-1248-2 data ready from load
for data ready from load This error could indicate SCS hardware
cell amplifier.
cell amplifier. problems.
1007989 O 300 (322)


The SCS aborted turning Make sure all emergency stops are
Failed to power motors on the motor power deactivated and try again. If all emergency
3-1249-2 due to a EM button because it detected that stops are deactivated and it still happens,
pressed one of the Emergency then use section 20.12 (Emergency stop
stops is active. trouble shooting) to try and find the problem.
The SCS tried to turn on
Failed to power motors If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1250-2 the motor power but
in a reasonable time support.
failed.
The emergency stop self-
Failed EM-stop test for If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1251-2 test failed when testing
SIG_EM_STOP_SW1 support.
emergency loop 1.
Failed EM-stop test for If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1252-2 test failed when testing
SIG_EM_STOP_SW2 support.
emergency loop 2.
Failed EM-stop test for
test failed when testing If the problem is recurring, contact product
3-1253-2 SIG_EM_STOP_SW1&
emergency loop 1&2 support.
2
together.
The error occurs when
trying to reset the stand in
Invalid C-Rot Collision normal mode without a
3-1255-2 Perform a C-Rotation collision calibration.
Calibration proper C-rotation collision
calibration (Collision_Limit
= 0)
The error occurs when
trying to reset the stand in
Invalid Height Collision normal mode without a
3-1256-2 Perform a Height collision calibration.
Calibration proper Height collision
calibration (Collision_Limit
= 0)
The HVG detected that
the Exposure Button was
1) Inform user on how correctly operate the
Exposure button was activated in the wrong
system.
4-7-1 pressed before the state, this could be due to:
2) Search loop for broken or poorly fitting
system was ready User mistake
cables, connectors etc.
faulty.
Arc (if the fault occurs 1. Reset the system. Try a low kV, low mAs
in the middle of a exposure.
scan) 2. Consider changing the HVG.
Generator failure (if 3. Measure the stator winding resistance on
4-31-2 High speed starter fault. the fault occurs every the tube according to 20.9.1. If not ok,
time a Compression consider changing the tube. If ok, consider
Done is tried) changing the HVG.
Defective stator
windings in the tube
4-32-2 Calibration fault N/A N/A
The HVG has detected a
filament current less than 1. Check tube filament by measuring
1 A, this can be due to: between pin 8-9 or pin 6-9 (depending on
which filament that is set) in the filament
Filament broken
cable (normal 0.2-1 ohm).
4-35-2 Filament under current Rectified 3-phase
2. Check HVGs incoming mains power and
below lower limit.
fuse F1 in side cabinet.
Compromised 3. Switch off and on the HVG (F1 and F12 in
parameters in the side cabinet)
generator
Incorrect signalling
Exposure interlock Check cabling between CCS, SCS and HVG.
4-36-2 sequence between CCS,
toggled in wrong state Possible hardware failure in SCS or HVG.
SCS and HVG.
The HVG detected that
the Exposure Button was
The exposure button 1. Inform user on how to correctly operate
activated in the wrong
was released before the system
4-37-2 state, this could be due to:
image acquisition 2. Search loop for broken or poorly fitting
User mistake
finished cables, connectors etc.
faulty
1007989 O 301 (322)


The HVG has aborted
exposure because the Check that the scan motion runs smoothly
4-38-2 Exposure time out scan motion did not finish and within specifications regarding scan
within 500 ms of its speed accuracy.
intended deadline.
Incorrect signalling
Enable interlock Check cabling between SCS and HVG.
4-39-2 sequence between SCS
toggled in wrong state Possible hardware failure in SCS or HVG.
and HVG.
The HVG detected current
flow through ground 1. Reset the system and try low kV, low mAs
greater than 1.8 mA, this exposures.
can be due to: 2. Verify by using a current clamp around the
Leak limit (ground
4-40-2 ground wire in the side cabinet mains
current too large) Arc
power cable. Check earth wires,
Bad grounding of the
connections and incoming power.
system
3. Consider changing the HVG.
HVG failure
The HVG detected the
Measure the stator winding resistance on the
absence of the SPEED
tube according to 20.9.1. If not ok, consider
4-41-2 Anode speed too low signal following the
changing the tube. If ok, consider changing
completion of the Boost
the HVG.
cycle.
filament current less than 1. Check tube filament by measuring
1 A, this can be due to: between pin 8-9 or pin 6-9 (depending on
which filament that is set) in the filament
Filament broken
cable (normal 0.2-1 ohm).
4-43-2 Filament under current Rectified 3-phase
2. Check HVGs incoming mains power and
below lower limit.
fuse F1 in side cabinet.
Compromised 3. Switch off and on the HVG (F1 and F12 in
parameters in the side cabinet)
generator
The HVG detected an
inverter temperature
greater than 80 C, this
can be due to: 1. Allow HVG to cool and resume work
HVG internal temp too
4-44-2 2. Improve room conditions
high. Heavy exposures
3. Consider changing the HVG
Poor cooling in the
room
HVG failure
The HVG has detected an 1. Reset the system, try low kV, low mAs
open Thermal Switch in exposures.
the x-ray tube for more 2. Check connector on generator side, it
than 500 ms via pin 5 and breaks easily. Verify that all pins and
7 in the filament cable, contacts in both male and female
this can be due to: connector are on the same height. If
connector is ok, try using a cable known to
Arc (thermal switch
be fault free
signalling disturbed by
4-45-2 Tube temp too high. 3. Check that the oil cooler is functional and
the arc)
running and that fuse F13 in side cabinet
Filament cable or
is on. If the tube is hot you should be able
connector broken
to feel a temperature difference between
Tube is too warm
the two oil hoses going into the tube when
because of limited oil
the cooler is functional. Try to restart the
flow
oil cooler by switching F13.
Temp switch in tube 4. Let the tube cool down and then measure
broken if the temp switch in the tube is still open.
1007989 O 302 (322)

HVG has detected an 1. Reset the system, try low kV, low mAs
open Flow Switch in the exposures.
heat exchanger for more 2. Verify that crimps are securely tightened
than 2 seconds via TB3 in connector
on the generator, this can 3. Verify that crimps are intact and securely
be due to: tightened
Arc (flow switch 4. Check that the oil cooler is functional and
signalling disturbed by running and that fuse F13 in side cabinet
the arc) is on. If the tube is hot you should be able
4-46-2 Tube oil cooler flow low to feel a temperature difference between
Cable to TB3 on top of
the two oil hoses going into the tube. Try
generator fits poorly
to restart the oil cooler by switching F13.
Poor connection in
Adjust hoses so they are quite loose
X5:13 or X5:14
where the connections are located and
No oil flow because of
that there is as few sharp bends as
strain on the hoses possible. Make sure that there is no strain
quick connections when the C-arm is rotated.
Air in oil cooling 5. Leave C-arm upright overnight, rotate C-
system arm to -60 degrees
Exposure parameters Verify that kV, mA and exposure time is within
4-47-2 Wrong exposure settings
invalid valid ranges
DC Rail Voltage less than
445Vdc, this can be due
to: 1. Check that three phase cable is securely
Mains power cable not tightened at both
Dc Rail (Rectified 3-
4-48-2 tightly fitted or 2. Check that the fuse F1 is on. Measure that
phase below limit)
Fuse in side cabinet there is incoming power to the generator.
off. 3. Improve the input power situation.
Incoming power is
lower than required in
the specification.
1. Keep doing exposures, preferably on low
Arc in the tube
mAs, low kV at start.
Arc in high voltage
2. Clean connectors and apply clean high
connector on HVG or
voltage grease.
4-49-2 Tube Arc. tube
3. Leave C-arm upright overnight, rotate
Air in tube housing (oil C-arm to -45 degrees.
level low or air 4. If problem persists consider changing the
bubbles) X-ray tube.
The HVG detected a
filament current over:
RAD70
5 A for more than 50 ms
or
4.4 A for more than 300
ms
RAD70B
6 A for more than 100 ms 1. Verify that the preheat time is correctly
or configured.
5.5 A for more than 300 2. Restore the generator parameters by
4-50-2 Filament overcurrent ms switching SW1:2 according to section
17.5.2.
this can be due to: 3. Consider changing the tube.
4. Consider changing the HVG.
Preheat time set
wrongly.
Preheat current value
in the generator set to
high
X-ray tube faulty and
needing too much
filament current to give
the right tube current.
HVG faulty.
1007989 O 303 (322)


The HVG detected a delta
between mA program and 1. Check connectors and incoming power to
mA feedback of greater generator
than 20%, this can be due 2. Check tube filament by measuring
to: between pin 8-9 or pin 6-9 (depending on
4-51-2 mA regulation which filament that is set) in the filament
cable (normal 0.2-1 ohm). If filament is not
Incoming power
broken then check filament cable.
unstable
3. Consider changing the generator.
Filament failure
4. Consider changing the tube.
HVG or tube failure
The HVG detected a delta
between kV program and 1. Check connectors and incoming power to
kV feedback of greater generator
than 20%, this can be due 2. Check tube filament by measuring
to: between pin 8-9 or pin 6-9 (depending on
4-52-2 kV regulation Incoming power which filament that is set) in the filament
unstable cable (normal 0.2-1 ohm)
Filament failure 3. Consider changing the generator.
HVG failure 4. Consider changing the tube.
Tube failure
HVG detected a mA
feedback value greater
than 10% of the mA
program, this can be due 1. Reduce preheat value and preheat time.
4-53-2 Over mA
to: 2. Consider replacing the generator.
Preheat setting wrong
causing mA overshoot.
HVG failure
HVG detected a kV
feedback value greater
than 10% of the kV
4-54-2 Over kV Consider changing the HVG.
program, this is most
probably due to a faulty
HVG.
DU has been turned off
DU line board shut probably due to
down unexpectedly. temperature above limit or
DU lost power.
The detector shuts
Detector lines or IPB Verify that cooling works. Switch on log of
down due to
5-5-2 reports too high temperature to see whats happening over
temperature out of
temperature. time.
limits.
IPB did not receive as
Timeout while waiting Verify that the scan speed is not too noisy.
5-6-4 many trig pulses as it
for trigs. Verify both min speed and max speed.
should.
Tried to setup
Temporary solution: "Reset, and try again."
5-30-4 DAQControl in wrong Internal error. Bug in CCS.
Contact product support.
state.
Tried to start readout or
access image data Temporary solution: "Reset, and try again."
5-31-4 Internal error. Bug in CCS.
when state doesn't Contact product support.
allow.
IPB had packet errors
(problem communicating
with detector). Errors from
this line, and maybe also
on lower indexed lines.
Image data
Temporary solution: Try again.
5-33-4 error from detector line If the problem is
0 temporary: disturbance.
If the problem remains:

Bad contact between LB
and DB. Check the
connector.
Image data error from Temporary solution: Try again.
5-34-4 See 5-33-4.
detector line 1 Contact product support.
1007989 O 304 (322)


5-35-4 See 5-33-4.
5-36-4 See 5-33-4.
5-37-4 See 5-33-4.
5-38-4 See 5-33-4.
5-39-4 See 5-33-4.
5-40-4 See 5-33-4.
5-41-4 See 5-33-4.
5-42-4 See 5-33-4.
5-43-4 See 5-33-4.
5-44-4 See 5-33-4.
5-45-4 See 5-33-4.
5-46-4 See 5-33-4.
5-47-4 See 5-33-4.
5-48-4 See 5-33-4.
5-49-4 See 5-33-4.
5-50-4 See 5-33-4.
Image data error from
5-51-4 See 5-33-4.
detector line 18
5-52-4 See 5-33-4.
detector line 19
5-53-4 See 5-33-4.
detector line 20
IPB had packet errors
with detector). IPB did not
receive enough correct
packages from DU.
Image data loss during
5-54-4 Causes: (1) jerky scan Contact product support.
data acquisition
movement, (2) bit error
between DU and IPB due
to disturbance or (3)
poorly fitted fibre cable
between IPB and DU.
Internal error, may be

caused by wrong If caused by bad parameters from Service
Internal error in
5-100-4 parameters selected in Tool use other parameters, otherwise contact
DAQControl.
Service Tool. Otherwise product support.
bug in CCS.
Ran out of memory

Failed to allocate memory Is another program using a lot of memory?
when fetching image
5-101-4 to fetch image data from Memory leakage in SW? Contact product
data from the image
IPB. support.
processing board.
1007989 O 305 (322)

The image processing CCS cannot communicate

Verify that the versions of CCS and IPB are
5-102-4 board interface version with IPB due to wrong
correct.
is not correct. interface version.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: Incompatible functionality
Command not in CCS and IPB, Might be
supported. Please incompatible versions of
contact product the CCS and IPB.
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error:
6-1-4 Command failed. Internal IPB error. Contact product support.
Please contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU IPB has no contact with
6-2-4 not responding. Please the DU. Check cable Contact product support.
contact product between IPB and DU.
support.
Data acquisition
Incompatible functionality
subsystem error:
in CCS and IPB. Might be
6-8-4 Unknown command. Contact product support.
incompatible versions of
the CCS and IPB.
support.
Data acquisition
Parameter from CCS to
subsystem error: Invalid
IPB is invalid. Might be
6-9-4 parameter. Please Contact product support.
contact product
the CCS and IPB.
support.
Data acquisition
Incompatible functionality
subsystem error: Invalid
in CCS and IPB. Might be
6-10-4 command format. Contact product support.
the CCS and IPB.
support.
Data acquisition
IPB has no contact with
subsystem error: DU Temporary solution: Try again.
6-100-4 the DU. Check cable
timeout. Please contact Contact product support.
between IPB and DU.
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
Packet error from IPB to
communication error Temporary solution: Try again.
6-101-4 DU. Check cable between
IPB to DB. Please Contact product support.
IPB and DU.
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
Packet error from DU to
6-102-4 IPB. Check cable between
DB to IPB. Please Contact product support.
IPB and DU.
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
Communication error
subsystem error: DU
between DU and IPB.
communication error
6-103-4 Might be incompatible Contact product support.
UNKNOWN. Please
versions of the DB, LB
contact product
and/or IPB.
support.
Packet errors in the DU
Data acquisition (problem communicating)
subsystem error: DU within the detector
communication error between DB and LB). Temporary solution: Try again.
6-200-4
DB to LB 0. Please If the problem is Contact product support.
contact product temporary: disturbance.
support. If the problem remains:
1007989 O 306 (322)


Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-201-4 See 6-200-4
DB to LB 1. Please Contact product support.
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-202-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-203-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-204-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-205-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-206-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-207-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-208-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-209-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-210-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-211-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
1007989 O 307 (322)


Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-212-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-213-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-214-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-215-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-216-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-217-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-218-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-219-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-220-4 See 6-200-4
contact product
support.
Packet errors in the DU
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
within the detector Temporary solution: Try again.
6-300-4 communication error LB
between DB and LB). Contact product support.
0 to DB. Please contact
If the problem is
product support.
temporary: disturbance.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-301-4 communication error LB See 6-300-4
product support.
1007989 O 308 (322)


Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
product support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
communication error LB Temporary solution: Try again.
6-310-4 See 6-300-4
10 to DB. Please Contact product support.
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-311-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-312-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-313-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
1007989 O 309 (322)


Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-314-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-315-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-316-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-317-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-318-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-319-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Data acquisition
subsystem error: DU
6-320-4 See 6-300-4
contact product
support.
Verify that version of CCS.exe and
standcomm.dll has same version.
Wrong interface between
7-2-4 - (standcomm.dll should only exists in Windows
Standcomm.dll and CCS.
folder, not in Sectra\AW\bin folder) Contact
product support.
Internal error. Bug in Temporary solution: "Restart computer."
7-10-4 -
standcomm.dll. Contact product support.
First try to reset. If that will
There is no connection
not help, CCS has Check status of connection and network card.
9-1-2 to the image processing
problem communicating Check if fibre is ok.
board.
with IPB.
Failed to retrieve Error in communication
command answer from between IPB and CCS. Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-2-2
the image processing IPB Network problem? Contact product support.
board. Bug in CCS/IPB?
Error in communication
Failed to send
between IPB and CCS. Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-3-2 command to the image
IPB Network problem? Contact product support.
processing board.
Bug in CCS/IPB?
There was no data in Error in communication
the reply from the between IPB and CCS. Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-4-2
image processing IPB Network problem? Contact product support.
1007989 O 310 (322)


There was not enough Error in communication
data in the reply from between IPB and CCS. Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-5-2
the image processing IPB Network problem? Contact product support.
Failed to connect to the
CCS failed to connect to
9-6-4 image processing Check status of IPB network and the fibre.
IPB.
board.
Received bad amount Internal error. Bug in Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-7-4
of trig times. CCS/IPB? Contact product support.
IPB self test reported Error in IPB (or subsystem
failure. tested by IPB in this test)
Failure during retrieval of
Failed to read image
data. IPB Network Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-9-2 data from the image
problem? Bug in Contact product support.
processing board.
CCS/IPB?
Failed to read image Failure during retrieval of
data from the image data. IPB Network Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-10-2
processing board due problem? Bug in Contact product support.
to timeout. CCS/IPB?
Got wrong answer Failure during retrieval of
while retrieving image data. IPB Network Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-11-4
data from the image problem? Bug in Contact product support.
processing board. CCS/IPB?
Received wrong
Failure during retrieval of
amount of packets
data. IPB Network Temporary solution might be: "Reset."
9-12-4 while retrieving image
problem? Bug in Contact product support.
data from the image
CCS/IPB?
processing board.
Error in communication
between IPB and CCS.
Received too much
IPB Network problem?
9-13-4 data from detector Contact product support.
Bug in CCS/IPB? Error
using test functionality.
should only occur in
"extreme" testing.
Asic calibration is Data for asic calibration is
10-1-4 Perform asic calibration.
required. missing.
Data for collimator
Collimator alignment is
10-2-4 alignment calibration is Perform collimator alignment.
required.
missing.
Geometry calibration is Data for detector
10-3-4 required. Detector geometry calibration is Perform geometry calibration.
geometry is not valid. missing.
Collimator alignment has
Geometry calibration is
been performed, or scan
10-4-4 required. Scan Perform geometry calibration.
geometry calibration is
geometry is not valid.
missing.
The default
10-5-4 compression paddle is - -
not calibrated.
Detector has been
restarted, a geometry
Full calibration is calibration has been
10-10-3 required. The flatfield performed, the flatfield Perform Full calibration.
calibration is invalid. calibration is older than 14
days , or flatfield
calibration data is missing.
AEC calibration is not
valid. Channel mask has
been changed or a full
Perform AEC calibration. If failing, check if
calibration has been
AEC calibration is output level is too low, then the tube might be
10-11-4 performed but the AEC
required. necessary to change. Consult product
calibration was not valid,
support.
or dose settings has been
changed but the AEC
calibration was not valid.
1007989 O 311 (322)


It is recommended to More than four hours have
10-12-9 perform an X-ray tube elapsed since last Perform a Warm-up procedure.
warm-up procedure. exposure.
It is recommended to More than 23 hours have
10-13-7 perform a Daily Quality elapsed since the last Perform a DQC
Check. DQC was approved.
It is recommended to
The flatfield calibration is
10-14-8 perform a Full Perform a Full calibration.
older than seven days.
calibration.
Bad configuration for
10-40-4 CCS configuration error. Check log file for details, and make it right.
calibration check.
Failed to find current
exposure configuration
10-41-4 CCS configuration error. Check log file for details, and make it right.
in the configuration
data.
Failed to calculate
timeout due to bad CCS configuration error.
10-42-4 flatfield data structure / Can also be caused by Check log file for details, and make it right.
wrong scan geometry corrupted flatfield data.
data.
Internal error during
10-100-4 check of calibration Internal error. Bug in CCS. Contact product support.
status.
Corruption of exposure
The exposure
parameters detected.
parameters were not Try again.
11-2-2 Could be caused by
correctly received by
software or firmware bugs
the HVG. Please reset.
or HVG hardware failure.
Reason for failure is difficult to determine.
Abnormal termination of
The exposure Check CCS log file for other reported errors.
exposure detected by
11-3-2 terminated with an Occasionally, this is caused by X-ray tube
HVG, but no cause
error. Arcing, which is otherwise reported as code
reported.
4-49-2.
1. Try resetting again.
2. Restart the HVG (or entire system) and try
Timeout resetting HVG. The HVG did not respond
11-4-2 again.
Please reset. to a reset request.
3. Check cabling between SCS and HVG.
4. Replace HVG.
1. Try resetting again.
2. Check HVG 3-phase fuse.
Timeout activating The HVG did not respond 3. Restart the HVG (or entire system) and try
11-5-2
HVG. Please reset. to an activate request. again.
4. Check cabling between SCS and HVG.
5. Replace HVG.
Enable interlock in
11-6-2 wrong state. Please Internal CCS error. Try again. Contact product support.
reset.
Unexpected event Try again. Contact product support if
11-7-2 Internal CCS error.
sequence. recurring.
No X-ray off was 1. Reset and try again.
The HVG did not signal
11-8-2 received from HVG. 2. Check CCS log files for other reported
end of exposure.
Please reset. errors.
1. Reset and try again.
HVG is in safe mode The HVG has entered
2. Check HVG cabling and three phase
11-9-2 when it should be SAFE mode when not
stability.
activated. Please reset. expected.
3. Replace HVG.
Unexpected HVG
11-10-2 Unexpected HVG restart. Check HVG single phase supply and fuse.
restart. Please reset.
The CCS has detected a
too high filament standby
current configuration in Observe: Activating the HVG from
Corrupt HVG the HVG. Activation is CalibrationTool or MameaGUI in this state
11-11-4 configuration parameter inhibited. may damage the X-ray tube.
detected This may be caused by
problems during Reinstall HVG firmware (see section 17.5.2).
installation of HVG
firmware.
1007989 O 312 (322)


The HVG did not turn on 1. Reset and try again.
No X-ray on was X-ray during exposure, but 2. Check cabling between HVG and SCS.
11-12-2
received from HVG. no fault condition was 3. Replace the HVG if the problem is
reported. recurring.
No response in
The HVG does not Check HVG power supply and fuse.
11-101-2 communication with
respond. Check cabling between HVG and SCS.
HVG.
1. Reset and try again.
HVG did not accept
11-102-2 Internal error. 2. Contact product support, as it could be a
command.
software or firmware problem.
1. Check cabling between HVG and SCS.
Incorrect response from Communication error 2. Reset and try again.
11-103-2
HVG. between CCS and HVG. 3. Contact product support, as it could be a
software or firmware problem.
Restart CCS service and try again.

11-104-2 Internal error in CCS. Internal error.
1007989 O 313 (322)

20.14 Alarm codes in SMC detector cooler

3 4
Code Cause Action Operation Spare parts
AL01 Low fluid level Fill up the fluid tank. Stop Level switch,
Pump
AL02 High temperature of 1. Ensure that the cooling fluid flow is Stop Dustproof filter,
cooling fluid at fluid 5 l/min or more. Temperature sensor
outlet 2. Reduce the ambient temperature or PT1
AL03 Rise in cooling fluid heat load. Continue Dustproof filter,
temperature at fluid 3. Wait until the temperature Temperature sensor
outlet decreases. PT1
AL04 Temperature of cooling Check the ambient temperature and the Continue Temperature sensor
fluid at fluid outlet temperature of the cooling fluid. PT1
AL05 High pressure at cooling 1. Ensure that the cooling fluid flow is Stop Temperature sensor
fluid inlet 5 l/min or more. PT2
2. Reduce the ambient temperature or
heat load.
AL06 High fluid pressure at Check the hoses for obstructions. Stop Temperature sensor
cooling fluid outlet PT1
AL07 Abnormal pump Restart the detector cooler and check Stop Pressure sensor,
operation the pump operation. Pump
AL08 Rise in fluid pressure at Check the hoses for obstructions. Continue Pressure sensor
fluid outlet
AL09 Drop in fluid pressure at 1. Restart the detector cooler and Continue Pressure sensor,
fluid outlet check that the pump is operating. Pump
2. Check the fluid level in the tank.
AL10 High compressor intake Check the temperature of the cooling Stop N/A
temperature fluid returning to the detector cooler.
If remaining, contact product support.
AL11 Low compressor intake 1. Check the flow of the circulating fluid. Stop Pump
temperature 2. Make sure that the circulating fluid in
AL12 Low super heat the evaporator is not frozen. Stop Pump
temperature 3. Use a 15% ethylene glycol aqueous
solution if operating with a set
temperature lower than 10C.
AL13 High compressor Reduce the ambient temperature or heat Stop Dustproof filter,
pressure load. Fan
AL15 Pressure drop on the Replace the detector cooler. Stop Detector cooler
high pressure side of the
refrigerant circuit
AL16 Pressure rise on the low Reduce ambient temperature or heat Stop Dustproof filter,
pressure side of the load. Fan,
refrigerant circuit If remaining, replace the detector cooler. Detector cooler
AL17 Pressure drop on the Check the flow of the cooling fluid. Stop Pump
low pressure side of the
refrigerant circuit
AL18 Compressor overload 1. Leave the detector cooler for 10 min. Stop Detector cooler
2. Restart the detector cooler.
3. If remaining, replace the detector
cooler.
AL19 Communication error Contact product support. Continue N/A
AL20 Memory error Stop N/A
AL21 DC line fuse Stop N/A
3
The default operation setting. Indicates if the operation of the detector cooler stops or continues after
the alarm has occurred.
4
Spare parts that might need to be replaced.
1007989 O 314 (322)

3 4
Code Cause Action Operation Spare parts
AL22 Temperature sensor Replace temperature sensor PT1. Stop Temperature sensor
failure at cooling fluid PT1
outlet
AL23 Temperature sensor Replace temperature sensor PT2. Stop Temperature sensor
failure at cooling fluid PT2
inlet
AL24 Compressor Replace the detector cooler. Stop Detector cooler
temperature sensor
failure
AL25 Pressure sensor failure Replace pressure sensor. Stop Pressure sensor
at cooling fluid outlet
AL26 Pressure sensor failure Replace the detector cooler. Stop Detector cooler
at cooling fluid inlet
AL27 Compressor pressure Replace the detector cooler. Stop Detector cooler
sensor failure
AL28 Operating time for the Replace the pump and reset the Continue Pump
pump has increased operating time.
20 000 h.
AL29 Operating time for the Replace the fan and reset the operating Continue Fan
fan has increased time.
20 000 h.
AL30 Operating time for the Replace the detector cooler. Continue Detector cooler
compressor has
increased 50 000 h.
1007989 O 315 (322)

Appendix A Maintenance and inspection

Philips MicroDose
Maintenance and inspection record
5
Facility: Serial number :
Signature: Test date:
Comments:
Checklist Annual Maintenance and inspection/replacement

Each year, the items listed in the checklist below must be thoroughly checked. Please refer to
the sub-sections in sections 9 and 15 for a more detailed description of some of the annual
maintenance tasks.
Task Result / Comments Signature

1 Plot motor currents for Collimator: Max current in +90: A
- moving down in +90 ( Limit 1.5 A)
- moving up in 0 ( Limit 1.7 A) Max current in 0: A
Check idle current at position 27. Max idle current in 0: A
2 Plot motor currents for Scan: Max current in +90: A

- in +90 ( Limit 5.5 A)
- in 0 ( Limit 5.5 A) Max current in 0: A
3 Plot motor currents for Compression:

Max current in 0: A
- during movement in 0 ( Limit 2 A)
Max idle current in 0: A
Check idle current at position 1480.
4 Replace the Collimator Curtain
annually. (1010575)
5 Replace the Fan Unit Filter (in stand)
annually. (1010557)
6 Inspect the Main cabinet Curtain
annually and replace if necessary.
(1010549)
7 Inspect the Foot Switches annually
and replace if necessary. (1018052)
8 Inspect the Patient Support annually
and replace if necessary.
(1010566/1020286)
9 Inspect the detector cooler annually
and replace if necessary. (1010595/
1018944)
5
The serial number of the stand can be found (1) in documentation delivered with the system, (2) on a
label on the door of the side cabinet or (3) in the About box found in the application.
1007989 O 316 (322)


10 Check that the air-inlet of the detector
cooler is not blocked.
11 Check all detector cooling hoses and
connections for any signs of crack,
ruptures or leakage.
12 Replace the dustproof filter of the
SMC detector cooler annually.
13 Check the operating time of the pump
of the SMC detector cooler. Plan for
replacement. The pump should be
replaced after 20 000 hours of
operation.
14 Check the operating time of the fan
motor of the SMC detector cooler.
Plan for replacement. The fan should
be replaced after 20 000 hours of
operation.
15 Check the operating time of the SMC
detector cooler. Plan for replacement.
The detector cooler should be
replaced after 50 000 hours of
operation.
16 Check that the 48 V to the detector
unit is within 48.0 V 1.0 V. If
necessary, adjust power supply
1010553.
17 Check the compression force (and
adjust if necessary).
18 Check the compression height (and
adjust if necessary).
19 Check that no cables are jammed,
pinched, exposed for pressure or are
obstructing the movement of any
mechanical parts in the modality.
Cables and cable chains should be
routed in a professional manner.
20 Test all mechanical movements of the
modality. Listen for abnormal sounds.
21 Lubricate the Compression ball screw
annually. (Use lubrication grease
1013019.)
22 Lubricate the Scan Movement ball
screw with nut. (Use lubrication
grease 1015566.)
23 Lubricate the collimator screw ball
screw annually. (Use lubrication
grease 1015566.)
24 Lubricate the Z-screw annually. (Use
lubricant SKF LGMT2 1013019.)
1007989 O 317 (322)


25 Check oil levels of the motor housing
(chapter 9.2.22).
26 Verify correct function of all buttons
and levers.
27 Verify correct functionality of the
emergency stops.
28 Check that all indicator lamps and all
lights are functioning. (Exposure
button, SIN/DX indicators on the
object table, power lamps on side-
and main cabinet.)
29 Check that all fans are working
properly, without any abnormal
sound.
30 Check the collision protection of the
collimator
31 Check the collision protection of the
C-arm rotation
32 Check the collision protection for the
down movement of the C-arm
33 Check the current through the X-ray
tube protective ground
34 Check the mechanical compression
safety coupling.
35 Check the software max compression
force limit.
36 Check that the compression paddle is
horizontal to the patient support.
37 Check for leakage of all hoses and
hose connections.
38 Perform air purge and oil level
adjustment of the X-ray system.
39 Run a check for X-ray ripple, visually
and by using software. See section
11.4.1 and 18.3.2 respectively.
40 Ask a user of the system about
his/her experiences of using the
system; e.g. problems and questions
that have arisen.
If the agreement with customer is that Philips should perform the semi-annual and annual
quality control procedures, also perform the testing quality control procedures, described in
the Quality control procedures [1].
1007989 O 318 (322)

Additional replacement of parts

In addition to the annual inspection and replacement schedule described above, the system
includes a few parts that have a longer replacement interval than one year.
Checklist Additional replacement of parts

1 Replace the X-ray Prevent Cover

every 2 years. (1010576)
2 Change the Detector cooling fluid

(1013399) every 5 years.
1007989 O 319 (322)

Appendix B Calibration dependencies
A B : New A requires new B

A B : A is required for B
A B : Optional if B performed
Tube
A B : A might require B.
A B : A is subpart of B
Objects affecting
Calibration SCS X-ray focus
Hardware DU (T b lli t t )
Status SCS
ASIC
Event calibration
Comp paddle Comp
calibration paddle
Collimator
alignment
Detector Objects in the
startup beam path
(Fixed added filter, Scan geometry
i )
Flatfield Flatfield*
timeout
Detector
Flatfield geometry
check
AEC calibration*
System
ready
* Full Calibration = Flatfield + AEC calibration
1007989 O 320 (322)

Philips Healthcare is part of
Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2012
All rights are reserved. Reproduction or
transmission in whole or in part, in any form
Royal Philips Electronics or by any means, electronic, mechanical or
otherwise, is prohibited without the prior
written consent of the copyright owner.
www.philips.com/healthcare
healthcare@philips.com This Medical Device meets the provisions of
the transposition of the Medical Device
Directive 93/42/EEC within the country of
Manufacturers address the EU Authorized Representative for the
device concerned.
Philips Digital Mammography
Copyrights and all other proprietary rights in
Sweden AB any software and related documentation
(Software) made available to you rest
Smidesvgen 5 exclusively with Philips or its licensors. No
SE-171 41 Solna title or ownership in the Software is

conferred to you. Use of the Software is
Sweden subject to the end user license conditions as

are available on request.
To the maximum extent permitted by law,

you shall not decompile and/or reverse
engineer the software or any part thereof.

O ServiceManual L30 en

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

O ServiceManual L30 en

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

English

Philips MicroDose L30

Document Title Service Manual Philips MicroDose L30 Software 8.4

Sections in the Service Manual:

Introduction and system overview

Service and troubleshooting

9.1 Annual maintenance and inspection ....................................................................... 49

13.26 Motor, rotation (1010583) .................................................................................... 187

20. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 267

Introduction and system overview

1.3 Intended readers

1.4 Chapter overview

Chapter 8 to 20 provides how-to descriptions and should be regarded as the recommended

[4] System Installation Manual Philips MicroDose L30, Software 8.4

1.6 Symbols used in the document

Warning is used when severe danger for patient, personnel or system

Notice Notice is used to underline information of importance.

The exposure symbol is used when an exposure is made.

1.7 Service and maintenance

1.8 Definitions, acronyms and abbreviations

Figure 1 An overview of the mammography stand and its main components.

2.2 Side cabinet

1 Air cooling unit

2.3 Acquisition workstation

Figure 3 Overview of the workstation.

1 Radiation protection shield

3. Overview of modality sub-systems

3.1 Overview and functionality of sub-systems

Figure 4 Overview and functionality of sub-systems.

Acquisition Workstation Software [A]

Acquisition Workstation Platform [B]

Service Tool [C]

Control Computer Software [D]

Image Processing Kit [E]

Data Acquisition System [F]

Detector System [G]

Stand Mechanics [H]

Stand Control System [I]

X-ray System [J]

3.2 System mains power overview

Figure 5 Electric power survey.

3.3 Performing an exposure

Figure 6 Performing an exposure.

Start examination [1]

Setting C-arm Projection [2]

Compression and Compression Done [3]

Set Exposure Parameters [4]

System Ready and Exposure Enabled [5]

A complete exposure is performed by pressing and holding the Exposure

5. Starting up the system

5.1 Switch OFF all circuit breakers

Figure 8 Circuit breaker positions OFF (down) and ON (up).

5.2 Initial start-up

5.3 Fill up the detector cooler

5.4 Continue the start-up sequence

2 F16 T2 24 V supply The green lamps mounted on the

6. How to shut down the system

6.1 Shutting down the modality

6.2 Cutting power to the system

7. Service prerequisites and material

q Loctite Hysol 9644

Unique Philips tools

Recommended additional equipment